WO2003024949A1 - Dna-pk inhibitors - Google Patents

Dna-pk inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2003024949A1
WO2003024949A1 PCT/GB2002/003781 GB0203781W WO03024949A1 WO 2003024949 A1 WO2003024949 A1 WO 2003024949A1 GB 0203781 W GB0203781 W GB 0203781W WO 03024949 A1 WO03024949 A1 WO 03024949A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
mmol
group
aryl
phenyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/GB2002/003781
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Roger John Griffin
Bernard Thomas Golding
David Richard Newell
Hilary Alan Calvert
Nicola Jane Curtin
Ian Robert Hardcastle
Niall Morrison Barr Martin
Graeme Cameron Murray Smith
Laurent Jean Martin Rigoreau
Xiao-Ling Fan Cockcroft
Vincent Junior Ming-Lai Loh
Paul Workman
Florence Irene Raynaud
Bernard Paul Nutley
Original Assignee
Cancer Research Technology Limited
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to JP2003528797A priority Critical patent/JP4332032B2/en
Priority to CA002454023A priority patent/CA2454023A1/en
Priority to HU0401052A priority patent/HUP0401052A3/en
Priority to DE60229531T priority patent/DE60229531D1/en
Priority to KR1020047002182A priority patent/KR100905457B1/en
Priority to GB0401411A priority patent/GB2393653B/en
Priority to DK02751439T priority patent/DK1417196T3/en
Priority to BR0211889-0A priority patent/BR0211889A/en
Application filed by Cancer Research Technology Limited filed Critical Cancer Research Technology Limited
Priority to MXPA04000804A priority patent/MXPA04000804A/en
Priority to US10/486,816 priority patent/US7226918B2/en
Priority to AU2002362385A priority patent/AU2002362385B2/en
Priority to NZ530909A priority patent/NZ530909A/en
Priority to EP02751439A priority patent/EP1417196B1/en
Publication of WO2003024949A1 publication Critical patent/WO2003024949A1/en
Priority to NO20040636A priority patent/NO20040636L/en
Priority to HK05103214A priority patent/HK1070368A1/en
Priority to US11/758,332 priority patent/US7674823B2/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/50—Pyridazines; Hydrogenated pyridazines
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D309/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D309/34—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom, not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D309/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom, not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with oxygen atoms directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D309/38—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom, not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with oxygen atoms directly attached to ring carbon atoms one oxygen atom in position 2 or 4, e.g. pyrones
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/04—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring
    • C07D311/22—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring with oxygen or sulfur atoms directly attached in position 4
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/78—Ring systems having three or more relevant rings
    • C07D311/92—Naphthopyrans; Hydrogenated naphthopyrans
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compounds which act as DNA-PK inhibitors, their use and synthesis.
  • DNA-PK The DNA-dependent protein kinase
  • DNA-PKcs a large catalytic subunit
  • Ku a regulatory component of DNA-PKcs
  • DNA-PK has been shown to be a crucial component of both the DNA double-strand break (DSB) repair machinery and the V(D)J recombination apparatus.
  • DLB DNA double-strand break
  • V(D)J V(D)J recombination apparatus.
  • DNA-PK components in a variety of other processes, including the modulation of chromatin structure and telomere maintenance (Smith, G. C. M. and Jackson, S.P., Genes and Dev. 13: 916-934 (1999) ) .
  • DSBs DNA double strand breaks
  • IR ionising radiation
  • anti-cancer drugs e.g. bleomycin
  • DNA DSBs are left unrepaired or are repaired inaccurately, mutations and/or chromosomal aberrations are induced, which in turn may lead to cell death.
  • eukaryotic cells have evolved several mechanisms to mediate their repair. In higher eukaryotes, the predominant of these mechanisms is DNA non-homologous end- joining (NHEJ) , also known as illegitimate recombination.
  • NHEJ DNA non-homologous end- joining
  • DNA-PK plays a key role in this pathway.
  • DNA-PKcs comprises a catalytic domain that falls into the PI 3- kinase family.
  • DNA-PK might be capable of phosphorylating inositol phospho-lipids, like certain well-characterised members of the PI 3-kinase family (Toker, A. and Cantley, L.C., Nature 387: 673-676 (1997) )
  • the available evidence indicates that DNA-PK has protein but not lipid kinase activity (Hartley et al . 1995;
  • DNA-PKcs appears to be restricted to higher eukaryotes.
  • ATM the protein deficient in the human neurodegenerative and cancer predisposition condition ataxia- telangiectasia (A-T; avin, M.F. and Shiloh,Y., Annu . Rev.
  • LY294002 is also able to weakly sensitise cells to the effects of IR (Rosenzweig, K.E., et al . , Clin. Cancer Res . 3: 1149-1156 (1999) ) .
  • DNA-PK inhibitors may also prove useful in the treatment of retroviral mediated diseases. For example it has been demonstrated that loss of DNA-PK activity severely represses the process of retroviral integration (Daniel R, et al . , Science, 284:644-7 (1999)). DNA-PK inhibitors may also have potential as modulators of the immune system.
  • DNA-PK has also been shown to play an important role in telomere maintenance, and hence inhibitors of DNA-PK may play a role in modulating telomere functions (Goytisolo, et al , Mol . Cell . Biol . , 21:3642-3651 (2001) .
  • the present inventors have now discovered compounds which exhibit inhibition of DNA-PK; these compounds also exhibit selective inhibition of DNA-PK over the PI 3-kinase family members PI 3-kinase and ATM.
  • the first aspect of the invention provides for the use of compounds of formula I :
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently hydrogen, an optionally substituted C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group, C 3 - 2 o heterocyclyl group, or C 5 _ 2 o aryl group, or may together form, along with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 ring atoms ;
  • X and Y are selected from CR 4 and O, O and CR' 4 and NR" 4 and N, where the unsaturation is in the appropriate place in the ring, and where one of R 3 and R 4 or R' 4 is an optionally substituted C 3 - 2 o heteroaryl or C 5 -2 0 aryl group, and the other of R 3 and R 4 or R' 4 is H, or R 3 and R 4 or R" 4 together are -A-B- , which collectively represent
  • One aspect of the first aspect of the present invention relates to compounds of formulae la or lb, where one R 3 and R 4 (or R' 4 ) is a C 3 _ 20 heteroaryl or C s _ 20 aryl group, and the other of R 3 and R 4 (or R' 4 ) is H.
  • Another aspect of the first aspect of the present invention relates to compounds of formulae la and lc, where R 3 and R 4 or R" 4 together are -A-B-, which collectively represent a fused optionally substituted aromatic ring, with the proviso given above . It is preferred that the medicament of the first aspect selectivity inhibits the activity of DNA-PK compared to PI 3- kinase and/or ATM. Selectivity is an important issue as inhibition of other PI 3-kinase family members may lead to unwanted side-effects associated with the loss of function of those enzymes .
  • a second aspect of the invention provides for the use of compounds as defined in the first aspect of the invention in the preparation of a medicament for use as an adjunct in cancer therapy or for potentiating tumour cells for treatment with ionising radiation or chemotherapeutic agents.
  • a third aspect of the invention provides for the use of compounds in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of retroviral mediated diseases or disease ameliorated by the inhibition of DNA-PK.
  • a further aspect of the invention provides an active compound as described herein for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
  • Another aspect of the invention provides a method of inhibiting DNA-PK in vi tro or in vivo, comprising contacting a cell with an effective amount of an active compound as described herein.
  • a further aspect of the present invention provides novel compounds as described herein. Defini tions
  • aromatic ring is used herein in the conventional sense to refer to cyclic aromatic rings, that is, cyclic structures having 5 to 7 atoms in a ring with delocalised ⁇ -electron orbitals.
  • aromatic rings are those which meet H ⁇ ckel's 4n+2 rule, ie . where the number of ⁇ - electrons is 4n+2 , n representing the number of ring atoms. It is preferred that the aromatic ring has six atoms. In such a case, it is further preferred that the four atoms additional to the core moiety that make up the aromatic ring are all carbon, which yields compounds of the following general structure :
  • R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 are preferably independently selected from hydrogen, C ⁇ - 7 alkyl, C 3 - 2 o heterocyclyl, C 5 - 2 o aryl, hydroxy, C ⁇ _ 7 alkoxy (including C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl-C ⁇ _ 7 alkoxy and C 3 - 2 o aryl-C x - 7 alkoxy) and acyloxy or adjacent pairs of substituents (i.e. R 5 and R 6 , R 6 and R 7 , R 7 and R 8 ) form, together with the atoms to which they are attached, an optionally substituted aromatic or carbocyclic ring.
  • the fused aromatic ring represented by -A-B- may be substituted by one or more of the following groups: C X - 7 alkyl, C 3 -2o heterocyclyl, C 5 - 20 aryl, hydroxy, C 1-7 alkoxy (including Ci- 7 alkyl-Ci-7 alkoxy and C 3 - 20 aryl-C ⁇ - 7 alkoxy) and acyloxy; adjacent pairs of substituents may form, together with the atoms to which they are attached, an optionally substituted aromatic or carbocyclic ring.
  • carbocyclic ring refers to a ring formed from 5 to 7 covalently linked carbon atoms.
  • the ring may contain one or more carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • Examples of carbocyclic rings include cyclopentane, cyclohexane, cycloheptane, cyclopentene, cyclohexene and cycloheptene .
  • Ci- 7 alkyl refers to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a Ci- 7 hydrocarbon compound having from 1 to 7 carbon atoms, which may be aliphatic or alicyclic, or a combination thereof, and which may be saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated.
  • saturated linear C . 7 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, and n-pentyl (amyl) .
  • saturated branched C ⁇ - 7 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, iso-propyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, and neo-pentyl.
  • saturated alicyclic C ⁇ - 7 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, groups such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl, as well as substituted groups (e.g., groups which comprise such groups), such as methylcyclopropyl , dimethylcyclopropyl , methylcyclobutyl, dimethylcyclobutyl, methylcyclopentyl, dimethylcyclopentyl, methylcyclohexyl, dimethylcyclohexyl, cyclopropylmethyl and cyclohexylmethyl .
  • substituted groups e.g., groups which comprise such groups
  • Examples of unsaturated C ⁇ - 7 alkyl groups which have one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds include, but are not limited to, ethynyl (ethinyl) and 2-propynyl (propargyl) .
  • Examples of unsaturated alicyclic (carbocyclic) C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl groups which have one or more carbon-carbon double bonds include, but are not limited to, unsubstituted groups such as cyclopropenyl , cyclobutenyl , cyclopentenyl, and cyclohexenyl , as well as substituted groups (e.g., groups which comprise such groups) such as cyclopropenylmethyl and cyclohexenylmethyl .
  • C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl refers to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a ring atom of a C 3 _ 20 heterocyclic compound, said compound having one ring, or two or more rings (e.g., spiro, fused, bridged) , and having from 3 to 20 ring atoms, atoms, of which from 1 to 10 are ring heteroatoms, and wherein at least one of said ring(s) is a heterocyclic ring.
  • each ring has from 3 to 7 ring atoms, of which from 1 to 4 are ring heteroatoms.
  • C 3 _ 2 o denotes ring atoms, whether carbon atoms or heteroatoms .
  • C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl groups having one nitrogen ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidines (tetrahydropyrrole) , pyrroline (e.g., 3-pyrroline, 2 , 5-dihydropyrrole) , 2H-pyrrole or 3H-pyrrole (isopyrrole, isoazole) , piperidine, dihydropyridine, tetrahydropyridine, and azepine.
  • pyrrolidines tetrahydropyrrole
  • pyrroline e.g., 3-pyrroline, 2 , 5-dihydropyrrole
  • 2H-pyrrole or 3H-pyrrole isopyrrole, isoazole
  • piperidine dihydropyridine, tetrahydropyridine, and azepine.
  • C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl groups having one oxygen ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from oxirane, oxetane, oxolane (tetrahydrofuran) , oxole (dihydrofuran) , oxane (tetrahydropyran) , dihydropyran, pyran (C 6 ) , and oxepin. Examples of substituted C 3 .
  • 2 o heterocyclyl groups include sugars, in cyclic form, for example, furanoses and pyranoses, including, for example, ribose, lyxose, xylose, galactose, sucrose, fructose, and arabinose.
  • C 3 . 2 o heterocyclyl groups having one sulphur ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from thiirane, thietane, thiolane (tetrahydrothiophene) , thiane (tetrahydrothiopyran) , and thiepane.
  • C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl groups having two oxygen ring atoms include, but are not limited to, those derived from dioxolane, dioxane, and dioxepane.
  • C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl groups having two nitrogen ring atoms include, but are not limited to, those derived from imidazolidine, pyrazolidine (diazolidine) , imidazoline, pyrazoline (dihydropyrazole) , and piperazine.
  • Examples of C 3 . 2 o heterocyclyl groups having one nitrogen ring atom and one oxygen ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from tetrahydrooxazole, dihydrooxazole, tetrahydroisoxazole, dihydroisoxazole, morpholine, tetrahydrooxazine, dihydrooxazine, and oxazine.
  • Examples of C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl groups having one oxygen ring atom and one sulphur ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from oxathiolane and oxathiane (thioxane) .
  • C 3 - 2 o heterocyclyl groups having one nitrogen ring atom and one sulphur ring atom include, but are not limited to, those .derived from thiazoline, thiazolidine, and thiomorpholine .
  • C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl groups include, but are not limited to, oxadiazine and oxathiazine.
  • C 5 - 2 o aryl refers to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an aromatic ring atom of a C 5 . 2 o aromatic compound, said compound having one ring, or two or more rings (e.g., fused), and having from 5 to 20 ring atoms, and wherein at least one of said ring(s) is an aromatic ring.
  • each ring has from 5 to 7 ring atoms .
  • the ring atoms may be all carbon atoms, as in "carboaryl groups” , in which case the group may conveniently be referred to as a n C 5 - 20 carboaryl” group.
  • C 5 - 2 o aryl groups which do not have ring heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, those derived from benzene (i.e. phenyl) (C 6 ) , naphthalene (C 10 ) anthracene (C i4 ) , phenanthrene (C i4 ) , naphthacene (C 18 ) , and pyrene (C 16 ) .
  • aryl groups which comprise fused rings include, but are not limited to, groups derived from indene and fluorene .
  • the ring atoms may include one or more heteroatoms, including but not limited to oxygen, nitrogen, and sulphur, as in “heteroaryl groups” .
  • the group may conveniently be referred to as a "C 5 _ 2 o heteroaryl” group, wherein “C 5 - 20 " denotes ring atoms, whether carbon atoms or heteroatoms.
  • each ring has from 5 to 7 ring atoms, of which from 0 to 4 are ring heteroatoms.
  • C 5 _ 2 o heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, C 5 heteroaryl groups derived from furan (oxole) , thiophene (thiole) , pyrrole (azole) , imidazole (1, 3-diazole) , pyrazole (1, 2-diazole) , triazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, oxadiazole, and oxatriazole; and Cg heteroaryl groups derived from isoxazine, pyridine (azine) , pyridazine (1, 2-diazine) , pyrimidine (1, 3-diazine; e.g., cytosine, thymine, uracil) , pyrazine (1, -diazine) , triazine, tetrazole, and oxadiazole (furazan)
  • C 5 -20 heterocyclic groups (some of which are C 5 - 20 heteroaryl groups) which comprise fused rings, include, but are not limited to, C 9 heterocyclic groups derived from benzofuran, isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, purine (e.g., adenine, guanine) , benzothiophene, benzimidazole; C ⁇ 0 heterocyclic groups derived from quinoline, isoquinoline, benzodiazine, pyridopyridine, quinoxaline; C 13 heterocyclic groups derived from carbazole, dibenzothiophene, dibenzofuran; C ⁇ heterocyclic groups derived from acridine, xanthene, phenoxathiin, phenazine, phenoxazine, phenothiazine.
  • C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl, C 3 _ 2 o heterocyclyl, and C 5 _ 20 aryl groups may themselves optionally be substituted with one or more groups selected from themselves and the additional substituents listed below.
  • Halo -F, -Cl, -Br, and -I.
  • Ether -OR, wherein R is an ether substituent, for example, a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group (also referred to as a C ⁇ _ alkoxy group, discussed below) , a C 3 - 2 o heterocyclyl group (also referred to as a C 3 - 20 heterocyclyloxy group) , or a C5- 20 aryl group (also referred to as a C 5 - 2 o aryloxy group) , preferably a C 1 -7 alkyl group .
  • R is an ether substituent, for example, a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group (also referred to as a C ⁇ _ alkoxy group, discussed below) , a C 3 - 2 o heterocyclyl group (also referred to as a C 3 - 20 heterocyclyloxy group) , or a C5- 20 aryl group (also referred to as a C 5 - 2 o aryloxy group) , preferably a C 1
  • C ⁇ _ 7 alkoxy -OR, wherein R is a C . ⁇ alkyl group.
  • Examples of C ⁇ _ 7 alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OCH 3 (methoxy) , -OCH 2 CH 3 (ethoxy) and -OC(CH 3 ) 3 (tert-butoxy) .
  • Oxo (keto, -one) : 0.
  • Imino (imine) : NR, wherein R is an imino substituent, for example, hydrogen, C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group, a C 3 - 2 oheterocyclyl group, or a C 5 -20 aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C_ 7 alkyl group.
  • Carboxy (carboxylic acid) : -C00H.
  • R is an acyloxy substituent, for example, a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group, a C 3 . 2 o heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 _ 20 aryl group, preferably a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group.
  • Amido (carbamoyl, carbamyl, aminocarbonyl , carboxamide) : -C( 0)NR 1 R 2 , wherein R 1 and R 2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups.
  • R 1 is an amide substituent, for example, hydrogen, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, a C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 20 aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C- 7 alkyl group
  • R 2 is an acyl substituent, for example, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, la C 3 _ 2 o heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 2 o aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C 1- alkyl group.
  • R 1 and R 2 may together form a cyclic structure, .as in, for example, succinimidyl , maleimidyl and phthalimidyl :
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently ureido substituents, for example, hydrogen, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, a C 3 _ 2 o heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 2 o aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group.
  • R 3 is an acyl group as defined for acyl groups.
  • acylureido groups include, but are not limited to, -NHCONHC (O) H, - NHCONMeC( ⁇ )H, -NHCONEtC (O) H, -NHCONMeC (O) Me, -NHCONEtC (0) Et, - NMeCONHC(0)Et, -NMeCONHC (O) Me, -NMeCONHC (O) Et , - NMeCONMeC(0)Me, -NMeCONEtC (O) Et , and -NMeCONHC (O) Ph.
  • Carbamate -NR 1 -C (O) -OR 2 wherein R 1 is an amino substituent as defined for amino groups and R 2 is an ester group as defined for ester groups.
  • carbamate groups include, but are not limited to, -NH-C (O) -O-Me, -NMe-C (O) -O-Me, -NH-C(0)-0- Et, -NMe-C (0) -O-t-butyl, and -NH-C (O) -O-Ph.
  • Tetrazolyl a five membered aromatic ring having four nitrogen atoms and one carbon atom
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently amino substituents, for example, hydrogen, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group (also referred to as C ⁇ _ 7 alkylamino or di-C ⁇ - 7 alkylamino) , a C 3 _ 2 o heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 2 o aryl group, preferably H or a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, or, in the case of a "cyclic" amino group, R 1 and R 2 , taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 ring atoms.
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently amino substituents, for example, hydrogen, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group (also referred to as C ⁇ _ 7 alkylamino or di-C ⁇ - 7 alkylamino) , a C 3 _ 2 o heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 2 o aryl group, preferably H or a C ⁇ _
  • amino groups include, but are not limited to, -NH 2 , -NHCH 3 , -NHC(CH 3 ) 2 , -N(CH 3 ) 2 , -N(CH 2 CH 3 ) 2 , and -NHPh.
  • cyclic amino groups include, but are not limited to, aziridino, azetidino, pyrrolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, and thiomorpholino .
  • Imino: NR, wherein R is an imino substituent, for example, for example, hydrogen, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, a C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 2 o aryl group, preferably H or a C 1-7 alkyl group.
  • R is an imino substituent, for example, for example, hydrogen, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, a C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 2 o aryl group, preferably H or a C 1-7 alkyl group.
  • Carbazoyl (hydrazinocarbonyl) : -C(0)-NN-R 1 wherein R 1 is an amino substituent as defined for amino groups .
  • azino groups include, but are not limited to, -C (O) -NN-H, - C(0)-NN-Me, -C(0)-NN-Et, -C(0)-NN-Ph, and -C (O) -NN-CH 2 -Ph.
  • Thiocyano (thiocyanato) -SCN.
  • Isothiocyano (isothiocyanato) : -NCS .
  • Thioether (sulfide) -SR, wherein R is a thioether substituent, for example, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group (also referred to as a C ⁇ - 7 alkylthio group) , a C 3 . 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 _ 20 aryl group, preferably a C- 7 alkyl group.
  • C_ 7 alkylthio groups include, but are not limited to, -SCH 3 and -SCH 2 CH 3 .
  • Disulfide -SS-R, wherein R is a disulfide substituent, for example, a C x _ 7 alkyl group, a C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 2 o aryl group, preferably a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group (also referred to herein as C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl disulfide) .
  • C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl disulfide groups include, but are not limited to, -SSCH 3 and — SCH 2 H 3 .
  • R is a sulfine substituent, for example, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, a C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 . 2 o aryl group, preferably a C_ 7 alkyl group.
  • R is a sulfonyloxy substituent, for example, a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, a C 3 - 2 o heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 _ 2 o aryl group, preferably a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group.
  • R is a sulfinyloxy substituent, for example, a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group, a C 3 - 2 o heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 -2 0 aryl group, preferably a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group.
  • R 1 is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups.
  • R 1 is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups
  • R is a sulfonamino substituent, for example, a C 1-7 alkyl group, a C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 _ 2 o aryl group, preferably a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group.
  • R 1 is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups
  • R is a sulfinamino substituent, for example, a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group, a C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5-20 aryl group, preferably a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group.
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups.
  • R 1 is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups
  • R is a sulfonamino substituent, for example, a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group, a C3-2 0 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 - 20 aryl group, preferably a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group.
  • a special class of sulfonamino groups are those derived from sultams - in these groups one of R 1 and R is a C 5 _ 20 aryl group, preferably phenyl, whilst the other of R 1 and R is a bidentate group which links to the C 5 - 20 aryl group, such as a bidentate group derived from a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group.
  • R 1 and R is a C 5 _ 20 aryl group, preferably phenyl
  • R 1 and R is a bidentate group which links to the C 5 - 20 aryl group, such as a bidentate group derived from a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group.
  • bidentate group which links to the C 5 - 20 aryl group, such as a bidentate group derived from a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group.
  • Phosphoramidite -OP (OR 1 ) -NR 2 2 , where R 1 and R 2 are phosphoramidite substituents, for example, -H, a (optionally substituted) C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group, a C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl group, or a C 5 _ 2 o aryl group, preferably -H, a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl group, or a C 5 - 2 o aryl group.
  • Examples of phosphoramidite groups include, but are not limited to, -OP (OCH 2 CH 3 ) -N (CH 3 ) 2 , -OP (OCH 2 CH 3 ) -N (i-Pr) 2 , and -OP (OCH 2 CH 2 CN) -N(i-Pr) 2 .
  • a C ⁇ _ 7 alkoxy group may be substituted with, for example, a C ⁇ - 7 alkyl (also referred to as a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl-C ⁇ - 7 alkoxy group) , for example, cyclohexylmethoxy, a C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl group (also referred to as a C 5 _ 20 aryl-C ⁇ - 7 alkoxy group) , for example phthalimidoethoxy, or a C 5 _ 20 aryl group (also referred to as a C 5 - 2 oaryl-C ⁇ - 7 alkoxy group) , for example, benzyloxy.
  • a reference to carboxylic acid (-COOH) also includes the anionic (carboxylate) form ⁇ -COO " ), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms.
  • a reference to an amino group includes the protonated form (-N + HR X R 2 ) , a salt or solvate of the amino group, for example, a hydrochloride salt, as well as conventional protected forms of an amino group.
  • a reference to a hydroxyl group also includes the anionic form (-0 " ), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms of a hydroxyl group.
  • Certain compounds may exist in one or more particular geometric, optical, enantiomeric, diasteriomeric, epimeric, stereoisomeric, tautomeric, conformational, or anomeric forms, including but not limited to, cis- and trans-forms; E- and Z- forms; c-, t-, and r- forms; endo- and exo-forms; R- , S-, and meso-forms; D- and L-forms; d- and 1-forms; (+) and (-) forms; keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms; syn- and anti-forms ; synclinal- and anticlinal-forms; - and ⁇ -forms; axial and equatorial forms; boat-, chair-, twist-, envelope-, and halfchair-forms; and combinations thereof, hereinafter collectively referred to as "isomers" (or "isomers" (or "isomers" (or "isomers" (or "is
  • isomers are structural (or constitutional) isomers (i.e. isomers which differ in the connections between atoms rather than merely by the position of atoms in space) .
  • a reference to a methoxy group, -0CH 3 is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, a hydroxymethyl group, -CH 2 OH.
  • a reference to ortho-chlorophenyl is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, meta- chlorophenyl .
  • a reference to a class of structures may well include structurally isomeric forms falling within that class (e.g., C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl includes n-propyl and iso-propyl; butyl includes n-, iso-, sec-, and tert-butyl; methoxyphenyl includes ortho-, meta-, and para-methoxyphenyl) .
  • keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/amidine, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, N-nitroso/hyroxyazo, and nitro/aci-nitro .
  • H may be in any isotopic form, including 1 H, 2 H (D) , and 3 H (T) ; C may be in any isotopic form, including 12 C, 13 C, and 1 C; 0 may be in any isotopic form, including 16 0 and 18 0; and the like.
  • a reference to a particular compound includes all such isomeric forms, including (wholly or partially) racemic and other mixtures thereof. Methods for the preparation (e.g. asymmetric synthesis) and separation (e.g., fractional crystallisation and chromatographic means) of such isomeric forms are either known in the art or are readily obtained by adapting the methods taught herein, or known methods, in a known manner. Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound also includes ionic, salt, solvate, and protected forms of thereof, for example, as discussed below.
  • a corresponding salt of the active compound for example, a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt.
  • a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al . , 1977, "Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts", J. Pharm. Sci . , Vol. 66, pp. 1-19.
  • a salt may be formed with a suitable cation.
  • suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na + and K + , alkaline earth cations such as Ca 2+ and Mg 2+ , and other cations such as Al 3+ .
  • Suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e., NH 4 + ) and substituted ammonium ions (e.g., NH 3 R + , NH 2 R 2 + , NHR 3 + , NR 4 + ) .
  • Examples of some suitable substituted ammonium ions are those derived from: ethylamine, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, triethylamine, butylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine, benzylamine, phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine.
  • An example of a common quaternary ammonium ion is N(CH 3 ) 4 + .
  • a salt may be formed with a suitable anion.
  • suitable inorganic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following inorganic acids: hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, sulphuric, sulphurous, nitric, nitrous, phosphoric, and phosphorous.
  • Suitable organic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following organic acids: acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, palmitic, lactic, malic, pamoic, tartaric, citric, gluconic, ascorbic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, aspartic, benzoic, cinnamic, pyruvic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetyoxybenzoic, fumaric, phenylsulfonic, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, pantothenic, isethionic, valeric, lactobionic, and gluconic.
  • suitable polymeric anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following polymeric acids: tannic acid, carboxymethyl cellulose.
  • solvate is used herein in the conventional sense to refer to a complex of solute (e.g. active compound, salt of active compound) and solvent. If the solvent is water, the solvate may be conveniently referred to as a hydrate, for example, a mono-hydrate, a di-hydrate, a tri-hydrate, etc.
  • chemically protected form pertains to a compound in which one or more reactive functional groups are protected from undesirable chemical reactions, that is, are in the form of a protected or protecting group (also known as a masked or masking group or a blocked or blocking group) .
  • a protected or protecting group also known as a masked or masking group or a blocked or blocking group
  • protecting a reactive functional group reactions involving other unprotected reactive functional groups can be performed, without affecting the protected group; the protecting group may be removed, usually in a subsequent step, without substantially affecting the remainder of the molecule. See, for example, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (T. Green and P. Wuts, Wiley, 1999) .
  • ether - OR
  • the aldehyde or ketone group is readily regenerated by hydrolysis using a large excess of water in the presence of acid.
  • an amine group may be protected, for example, as an amide or a urethane, for example, as: a methyl amide (-NHC0-CH 3 ); a benzyloxy amide (-NHCO-OCH 2 C 6 H 5 , -NH-Cbz) ; as a t-butoxy amide (-NHCO-OC (CH 3 ) 3 , -NH-Boc) ; a 2-biphenyl-2- propoxy amide (-NHCO-OC (CH 3 ) -NH-Bpoc) , as a 9- fluorenylmethoxy amide (-NH-Fmoc) , as a 6-nitroveratryloxy amide (-NH-Nvoc) , as a 2-trimethylsilylethyloxy amide (-NH- Teoc) , as a 2 , 2 , 2-trichloroethyloxy amide (-NH-Troc) , as an allyloxy amide (
  • a carboxylic acid group may be protected as an ester for example, as: an C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl ester (e.g. a methyl ester; a t-butyl ester); a C 1-7 haloalkyl ester (e.g., a C x _ 7 trihaloalkyl ester) ; a triC 1-7 alkylsilyl-C ⁇ - 7 alkyl ester; or a C 5 _ 2 o aryl-C ⁇ - 7 alkyl ester (e.g. a benzyl ester; a nitrobenzyl ester); or as an amide, for example, as a methyl amide.
  • an C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl ester e.g. a methyl ester; a t-butyl ester
  • a C 1-7 haloalkyl ester e.g., a C x _ 7 trihaloalkyl ester
  • a thiol group may be protected as a thioether
  • prodrug refers to a compound which, when metabolised (e.g. in vivo) , yields the desired active ' compound.
  • the prodrug is inactive, or less active than the active compound, but may provide advantageous handling, administration, or metabolic properties.
  • some prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g. a physiologically acceptable metabolically labile ester) .
  • Examples of such metabolically labile esters include those wherein R is C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl (e.g. -Me, -Et) ; C ⁇ _ 7 aminoalkyl (e.g.
  • acyloxy-C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl e.g. acyloxymethyl ; acyloxyethyl ; e.g.
  • pivaloyloxymethyl ; acetoxymethyl; 1-acetoxyethyl; 1- (1-methoxy-l-methyl) ethyl- carbonxyloxyethyl ; 1- (benzoyloxy) ethyl; isopropoxy- carbonyloxymethyl ; 1-isopropoxy-carbonyloxyethyl ; cyclohexyl- carbonyloxymethyl; 1-cyclohexyl -carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxymethyl ; 1-cyclohexyloxy- carbonyloxyethyl ; (4-tetrahydropyranyloxy) carbonyloxymethyl; 1- (4 -tetrahydropyranyloxy) carbonyloxyethyl ; (4 -tetrahydropyranyl) carbonyloxymethyl; and 1- (4-tetrahydropyranyl) carbonyloxyethyl) .
  • prodrugs are activated enzymatically to yield the active compound, or a compound which, upon further chemical reaction, yields the active compound.
  • the prodrug may be a sugar derivative or other glycoside conjugate, or may be an amino acid ester derivative.
  • 'Selective inhibition means the inhibition of one enzyme to a greater extent than the inhibition of one or more other enzymes. This selectivity is measurable by comparing the concentration of a compound required to inhibit 50% of the activity (IC 50 ) of one enzyme against the concentration of the same compound required to inhibit 50% of the activity (IC 50 ) of the other enzyme (see below) . The result is expressed as a ratio. If the ratio is greater than 1, then the compound tested exhibits some selectivity in its inhibitory action.
  • the compounds of the present invention preferably exhibit a selectivity of greater than 3, 10, 20 or 50 against DNA-PK over PI 3-kinase.
  • the compounds of the present invention preferably exhibit a selectivity of greater than 5, 10, 50 or 100 against DNA-PK over ATM.
  • IC 50 s used to determine selectivity are determined using the methods described herein. Brief Description of the Drawings
  • Figure 1 shows the structure of preferred compounds of formula lb.
  • Figure 2 shows the structure of preferred compounds of formula lc.
  • FIG. 1 shows the structure of preferred compounds of formula la.
  • FIG. 4 shows the structures of further preferred compounds of formula la.
  • Figure 5 shows the structures of further preferred compounds of formula la.
  • R 1 and R 2 form, along with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms, this may form part of a C 4 _ 2 o heterocyclyl group defined above (except with a minimum of 4 ring atoms) , which must contain at least one nitrogen ring atom. It is preferred that R x and R 2 form, along with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, a heterocyclic ring having 5, 6 or 7 atoms, more preferably 6 ring atoms.
  • Single rings having one nitrogen atom include azetidine, azetidine, pyrrolidine (tetrahydropyrrole) , pyrroline (e.g., 3-pyrroline, 2 , 5-dihydropyrrole) , 2H-pyrrole or 3H-pyrrole (isopyrrole, isoazole) , piperidine, dihydropyridine, tetrahydropyridine , and azepine;
  • two nitrogen atoms include imidazolidine, pyrazolidine (diazolidine) , imidazoline, pyrazoline (dihydropyrazole) , and piperazine;
  • one nitrogen and one oxygen include tetrahydrooxazole, dihydrooxazole, tetrahydroisoxazole, dihydroisoxazole, morpholine, tetrahydrooxazine, dihydrooxazine, and oxazine;
  • Preferred rings are those containing one heteroatom in addition to the nitrogen, and in particular, the preferred heteroatoms are oxygen and sulphur.
  • preferred groups include morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiazolinyl .
  • Preferred groups without a further heteroatom include pyrrolidine
  • the most preferred groups are morpholino and thiomorpholino.
  • these heterocyclic groups may themselves be substituted; a preferred class of substituent is a C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl group.
  • the substituent group or groups are preferably methyl or ethyl, and more preferably methyl .
  • a sole methyl substituent is most preferably in the 2 position.
  • rings with bridges or cross-links are also envisaged.
  • Examples of these types of ring where the group contains a nitrogen and an oxygen atom are :
  • the proviso as set in the first aspect of the invention preferably excludes compounds where X and Y are CR 4 and O, R 3 and R 4 together form a fused benzene ring, and R 1 and R together with the N to which they are attached form a morpholino group, and the fused benzene does not bear as a sole substituent a substituent at the 8- position.
  • An alternative preferred embodiment is to exclude compounds where X and Y are CR 4 and O, R 3 and R 4 together form a fused benzene ring, and R 1 and R 2 together with the N to which they are attached form a morpholino group, and the fused benzene does not bear a sole substituent that is a phenyl group.
  • R 1 and R 2 in formula la together form a morpholino group.
  • R 4 is preferably H.
  • R 3 is preferably a C 5 . 20 aryl group, more preferably a C 5 - 20 carboaryl group, and in particular an optionally substituted phenyl group.
  • Preferred substituents include halo (particularly fluoro and chloro) , C ⁇ - 7 alkyl (particularly C x alkyl or t-butyl) , ether, alkoxy (in particular methoxy) , nitro, cyano, acyl, formyl, ester, acyloxy, hydroxy, carboxy, C 5 _ 20 aryl (particularly phenyl) , C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl, acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido, and amino.
  • R 3 is C 5 _ 20 aryl
  • examples of preferred groups include optionally substituted napthalene, quiniline, pyridine, indole, indazole, pyrazine, pyrrole, imidazole, thiophene, thiazole, benzo [b] thiophene, furan and benzofuran.
  • R 3 may be substituted with one or more substituents, preferably one substituent.
  • R 3 is a mono substituted phenyl.
  • R 3 is a C 5 - 2 o aryl group other than phenyl
  • preferred substituents include C ⁇ - 7 alkyl, formyl and ether (in particular alkoxy) .
  • R 3 When R 3 is a C 3 - 2 o aryl group, the substituents may be at any position on the aryl group. Accordingly, when R 3 is an optionally substituted phenyl the substituents may be at the ortho- (2-) , meta- (3-) or para- (4-) position. It is generally preferred that the substituents are in the para- (or 4-) position. Preferably R 3 is a 4-substituted phenyl. The nature of the substituent is discussed below.
  • a first group of preferred substituents include halo (particularly fluoro and chloro) , C ⁇ - 7 alkyl (particularly t- butyl) and alkoxy (particularly methoxy) .
  • Preferred compounds of this type include 2- (morpholin-4-yl) -6- phenyl-pyran-4-one (Compound 285), 2- (4-chlorophenyl) -6- (morpholin-4-yl) -pyran-4-one (Compound 284) , 2- (3- methoxyphenyl) -6- (morpholin-4-yl) -pyran-4-one (Compound 287), 2- (4- tert-butyl-phenyl) -6- (morpholin-4-yl) -pyran-4-one
  • the substituent is C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl, and in particular Ci alkyl or t-butyl.
  • R 3 is substituted C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl (i.e. C_ 7 alkylene), and preferred substituents are discussed below.
  • a second group of preferred substituents include acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido and amino.
  • the amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups of the preferred acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido and amino substituents are independently H, C ⁇ - 7 alkyl (including substituted C ⁇ - 7 alkyl, i.e. C ⁇ _ 7 alkylene) , C 5 - 2 o aryl (including C 5 - 20 aralkyl) , C 3 - 20 heterocycle or two of the groups form a heterocycle.
  • amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups are independently H, C alkyl, phenyl or heterocyclyl containing 3 to 7 ring atoms, or two or more groups form a heterocyclyl ring.
  • amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups of the second group of preferred substituents are C 5 - 2 o aryl it is preferred that the C 5 _ 2 o aryl is phenyl, benzyl, pyridine, pyrimidine, oxazine, furan, thiophene, imidazole or oxazole.
  • amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups of the second group of preferred substituents are C 3 - 20 heterocyclyl they preferably have 3 to 7 ring atoms and preferably contain from 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms .
  • heterocyclyl preferably comprises 3 to 7 ring members .
  • the heterocyclyl contains from 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms.
  • preferred heterocyclyls include those derived from piperazine and azepine, morpholine and thiomorpholine .
  • R 3 of formula la is C 5 - 20 aryl group or C 5 - 20 carboaryl group
  • the C 5 - 20 aryl or C 5 _ 2 o carboaryl group is substituted. It is also preferred that when R 3 is optionally substituted phenyl, the optionally substituted phenyl group is itself further substituted. It is particularly preferred that the preferred R 3 substituents discussed above are further substituted (i.e.
  • the further substitution may comprise any of the substituents or groups described herein but is preferably one or more of halo (in particular fluoro or chloro) , nitro, cyano (in particular methyl- or ethylcyano) , hydroxy, ester, ether, alkoxy (in particular methoxy) , acyloxy, acyl, thioether, carboxy, amino (in particular -NH 2 and -NMe 2 ) , C 5 _ 2 o aryl (in particular phenyl, thiophene and furan), thioether, carbamate, C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl and C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl (in particular N- , O- and S- containing heterocyclyl including tetrahydrofuran, piperidine and pyrrolidine) .
  • R 3 may be haloalkyl substituted phenyl, cyanoalkyl substituted phenyl or trifluoromethoxy substituted phen
  • R 3 of formula la is C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl substituted phenyl it is preferred that the alkyl substituent is further substituted (to form C ⁇ - 7 alkylene) by halo, amino, amido, acylamido, ester or acyloxy groups .
  • R 3 is a phenyl substituted with acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido or amino
  • substituents are further substituted, preferably by halo (in particular fluoro or chloro) , nitro, cyano (in particular methyl- or ethylcyano) , hydroxy, ester, ether, acyloxy, acyl, thioether, carboxy, C 5 _ 2 o aryl, C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl and C 3 _ 20 heterocyclyl (in particular N- , O- and S- containing heterocyclyl) .
  • R 3 is aminomethyl substituted phenyl, where the amino group is preferably further substituted as stated above.
  • the aminomethyl group is at the 3- or 4-position on the phenyl.
  • R 3 is amido substituted phenyl, where the amido group is preferably further substituted as stated above.
  • the amido group is at the 3- or 4-position on the phenyl.
  • R 3 is acylamido substituted phenyl, where the acylamido group is preferably further substituted as stated above.
  • the acylamido group is at the 3- or 4-position on the phenyl.
  • R 3 is amino substituted phenyl, where the amino group is preferably further substituted as stated above .
  • the amino group is at the 3- or 4-position on the phenyl.
  • R 3 and R 4 together are -A-B- , which collectively represent a fused aromatic ring which is benzene
  • R 5 H
  • the substituents are selected from halo (in particular bromo) ; ether (in particular aralkyl ethers and especially where the aryl is further substituted with halo, C_ 7 alkyl, alkoxy or nitro) ; C 5 - 20 aryl (in particular napth-1-yl and napth-2-yl) optionally substituted by C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl (in particular methyl) including C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl (in particular propyl) substituted by C 5 - 2 o aryl (preferably phenyl) ; C 5 - 2 o heteroaryl (in particular benzo [b] thiophen-3-yl , benzo [b] thiophen-2-yl , thiophen-3-yl , thiophen-2-yl, furan-2-yl, indol-6-yl, quinoline-8-yl, phenoxathiin-4-yl) optionally substituted by acyl (in
  • the fused benzene ring i.e. -A-B-
  • the fused benzene ring is substituted at the 8- position with a C 3 _ 2 o heterocyclyl group.
  • the heterocyclyl group is a tricyclic structure.
  • the group comprises oxygen and/or sulfur heteroatoms and is based on the carbazole or anthracene system.
  • a sulfur atom and/or oxygen atom is present in the central ring of the carbazole or anthracene systems.
  • the phenyl is itself further substituted.
  • the phenyl is mono substituted but it may also be di substituted.
  • Preferred substitutents include ester (especially where the ester substitutent is aralkyl, in particular benzyl, or C ⁇ - 7 alkyl, in particular methyl or ethyl) ; ether (especially where the ether substituent is C_ 7 alkyl, in particular methyl or trifluoromethyl, or arylalkyl, in particular benzyl); cyano; acyl (especially where the acyl subsituent is C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl, in particular methyl) ; C 5 _ 20 aryl (in particular phenyl) ; acylamido (especially where the acyl substituent is C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl, in particular methyl) ; halo (in particular chloro) ; C ⁇ - 7 alkyl (preferably methyl or ethyl) especially C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl substituted by hydroxy, fluoro, acylamido (
  • the C ⁇ - 7 alkoxy is preferably either ethoxy, especially ethoxy substituted by optionally substituted aryl (in particular phenyl or pyridinyl) , optionally substituted aryloxy (in particular phenoxy, napthyloxy) , alkoxy, sulfonoxy (in particular where the sulfonoxy substituent is alkyl, such as methyl or ethyl, or aryl, such as phenyl), or C ⁇ _ 7 alkoxy is -0-CH 2 -, where the alkoxy substituent is preferably optionally substituted aryl (in particular phenyl or pyridinyl) and the C 3 - 0 aryl group is preferably optionally substituted phenyl, where the phenyl group being substituted is more preferred.
  • Preferred compounds of this type include 7-methoxy-2- morpholin-4-yl-benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 304), 7- hydroxy-2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 307) , 7- Benzyloxy-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 337) , 7- Benzoyloxy-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 423), 2- Morpholin-4-yl-7- (naphthalene-2-ylmethoxy) -chromen-4-one (Compound 418), 7- (4-Fluoro-benzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl- chromen-4-one (Compound 414), 7- (4-Bromo-benzyloxy) -2- morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 416) , 7- Cyclohexylmethoxy-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen
  • R 3 and R 4 together are -A-B- , which collectively represent a fused aromatic ring which is benzene
  • R 3 and R 4 together are -A-B- , which collectively represent a fused aromatic ring which is benzene
  • These further fused rings may be in any position on the fused ring.
  • Preferred compounds of this type include 2- (morpholin-4-yl) - benzo [h] chro en-4 -one (Compound 293), 2- (morpholin-4-yl) - benzo [g] chromen-4-one (Compound 301), 7, 8, 9, 10-tetrahydro- benzo [h] -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 297) , 2- (thiomorpholin-4-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 296), 2- pyrrolidin-1-yl -benzo [h] chromen-4 -one (Compound 312), 2- morph ⁇ lin-4-yl-benzo [f] chromen-4-one (Compound 310), 2-
  • R 3 and R 4 together form -A-B- which represents a fused ring
  • the amino group at the 2 position is selected from dimethylmorpholino (in particular 3 , 5-dimethylmorpholino) , methylmorpholino (in particualar 3-methylmorpholino) , 3,4- dihydro-2H-benzo [1, 4] oxazin-4-yl, di (2-hydroxyethyl) amino, 2- (2-Hydroxy-ethoxy) -ethylamino or 2- (2-Bromo-phenoxy) - ethylamino.
  • R 4 is preferably H.
  • R 3 is preferably a C 5 - 2 o aryl group, more preferably a C 5 _ 20 carboaryl group, and in particular an optionally substituted phenyl group. It is generally preferred that the substituents are in the para- (or 4-) position.
  • Preferred substituents include halo, C_ 7 alkyl and alkoxy, and more preferably halo (particularly chloro) and alkoxy (particularly methoxy) .
  • Preferred compounds of this type are 6- (4-methoxyphenyl) -4- morpholin-4-yl-pyran-2-one (Compound 3) and 6- (4- chlorophenyl) -4-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-2-one (Compound 4) . (See Figure 1) .
  • R 3 and R" 4 together are -A-B- which represents a fused aromatic ring which is pyridine, and the compounds are substituted at the 2- position, preferably with amino substituents. It is preferred that the amino groups are ethylmorpholino (in particular 3- ethylmorpholino) , dimethylmorpholino (in particular 3- dimethylmorpholino) , 2 , 5-dihydro-lH-pyrrol-l-yl , or pyrrolidin-1-yl .
  • R 1 and R 2 of formula lc form morpholine, ethylmorpholine (in particualr 3- ethylmorpholine) , dihydropyrrole (in particular 2,5-dihydro- IH-pyrrol-l-yl or tetrahydropyrrole) .
  • Preferred compounds of this type are 2-morpholin-l-yl- pyrimido- [2 , 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 5), 2-((S)-3- Hydroxy-pyrrolin-1-yl) -pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 12), 2- ( (2S, 6R) -2 , 6-Dimethyl-morpholin-4-yl) - pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 13) and 2- Thiomorpholin-4 -yl-pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 6), with 2 -morpholin-1-yl-pyrimido- [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 5) being the most preferred. (See Figure 2) .
  • the substituent (R 7 ) is selected from hydroxy, C ⁇ _ alkoxy (including C ⁇ _ 7 alkyl-C ⁇ - 7 alkoxy and C 3 - 2 o aryl-C ⁇ -7 alkoxy) and acyloxy, with C 3 _ 2 o aryl-C ⁇ - alkoxy being the most preferred.
  • the C ⁇ - 7 alkoxy is preferably -0-CH 2 - and the C 3 - 2 o aryl group is preferably optionally substituted phenyl.
  • the synthetic strategy involves performing a cyclisation to form the central core followed by a coupling reaction such as a Suzuki reaction to add substituents to the core structure.
  • Tetrabutylammonium hydrogen sulphate (6.76g, 20mmol) and sodium hydroxide (21.6g, 40mmol) were dissolved in water (50ml) .
  • the aqueous layer was removed and iodoethane (5 ml) was added to the dichloromethane solution that was then stirred for lh.
  • the solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue taken into water (200ml) .
  • Morpholine (1.31ml, 15mmol) was added to a solution of ethyl 3 -aryl-3-hydroxy-dithioacrylate (15mmol) in ethanol (20ml) .
  • the reaction mixture was refluxed for 5 h and upon cooling at room temperature the desired compound crystallized. The compound was then isolated by filtration.
  • the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, than the relevant amine can be used in step (c) in place of morpholine.
  • the 6-aryl group in the final product can be a heteroaryl group, if the appropriate acetophenone derivative is used as a starting material.
  • substituents are desired on the central core of two fused rings, these can be introduced by varying the substituents on the 2 -amino pyridine ring of the starting material, using protecting groups where appropriate.
  • the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, then the relevant amine, for example dimethylmorpholine can be used in step (b) in place of morpholine .
  • Synthesis route 4 Synthesis of 6-Aryl-2-morpholin-4-yl-pyran- 4-one and 6-heterocycle-2-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one a) aryl /heterocycle boronic acid, Cs 2 C0 3 , Pd (PPh 3 ) 4 , 90 °C
  • the 6-substituent is desired to be a heterocycle rather than aryl
  • the appropriate heterocycle boronic acid can be substituted for aryl boronic acid above .
  • Synthesis route 4a Synthesis of N-Alkyl 3- (6-Morpholin-4-yl- 4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) -benza ide derivatives
  • Chloropyranone (10.75 g, 50 mmol) and 4- formylphenylboronic acid (9.0 g, 60 mmol) were stirred in a solution of degassed dioxane (110 ml) for 20min. This was followed by the addition of Na 2 C0 3 (13.8 g, 100 mmol) and tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) palladium (2.88 g, 2.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was further degassed for 10 min and heated to 80°C under N 2 for 18 h.
  • Isocyanate or isothiocyanate can be used in place of acid chloride to generate ureido or thioureido structures .
  • Isocyanate or isothiocyanate can be used in place of acid chloride to generate ureido or thioureido structures.
  • Methyl 3- (3-aryl) -3-oxo-2-triphenylphosphoranylpropanoate (9 mmol) was slowly warmed to 250°C in a kugelrohr distillation apparatus (1 Torr) . Distillate was collected for 20 minutes at 250°C and was purified by column chromatography to give the desired product.
  • reaction was then cooled to -78°C and methyl 3 - (3-aryl) propiolate (6 mmol) in THF (5 ml) was added dropwise to the reaction mixture and left to react at - 78°C for 30 minutes and then to 0°C for 1 h.
  • the reaction mixture was quenched with water (15 ml) and the white suspension extracted twice with dichloromethane (30ml) .
  • the organics were combined and evaporated under reduce pressure to give a solid which was triturated with acetone (10ml) .
  • the solid was filtered and washed successively with water (5 ml) , acetone (5 ml) and ether (5 ml) .
  • the solid obtained was then dried in vacuo overnight at 40°C to give the desired compound.
  • step (c) If the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, than the relevant acetyl amine can be used in step (c) in place of acetyl morpholine.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at this temperature for 90 minutes and then treated with a solution of the relevant salicylate ester in THF (25 ml) , followed by additional THF (5 ml) .
  • the reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred for 16 h.
  • the solution was quenched with water (5 ml) and 2 M hydrochloric acid (50 ml) and extracted into DCM (3 x 80 ml) .
  • the organic extracts were combined, washed with brine (50 ml) , dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo to give an oily residue .
  • the crude product was stirred vigorously in hot ether, causing precipitation of a white solid. This was collected, after cooling in ice, by filtration and washed with cold ether, to provide the desired compound.
  • the extracts were dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo to give a solid.
  • the crude product was partially dissolved in DCM and loaded onto a silica column, eluting with DCM followed by (1%; 2%; 5%) methanol in DCM. All fractions containing the desired product were combined and evaporated in vacuo to give an orange solid.
  • the crude product was dissolved in hot methanol, treated with charcoal, filtered through celite and recrystallised from methanol to provide the desired compound.
  • amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino
  • relevant acetyl amine can be used in step (b) in place of acetyl morpholine.
  • Synthesis Route 7a Synthesis of 2-amino-chromen-4-ones (2 nd method)
  • a suspension of potassium tert-butoxide (7.20 g, 64 mmol) in toluene (50 ml) was cooled to ⁇ 10°C and treated with a solution of the appropriate acetoaryl and carbon disulphide (1.20 ml, 20.0 mmol) in toluene (50 ml) .
  • the resultant mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then treated with water (500 ml) .
  • the mixture was washed with ether (2 x 100 ml) and charged into a 3 -neck round bottom flask.
  • the aqueous solution was treated with 10% sulphuric acid, venting the flask through a bleach trap.
  • the resultant suspension was stirred for 24 h to allow for removal of hydrogen sulphide.
  • the solid was collected by filtration, washing with water (3 x 50 ml) and cold petrol (3 x 50 ml) . Recrystallisation from ethyl acetate / petrol provided the desired compound.
  • a solution of the appropriate 2- (ethylthio) -benzo-chromen-4 - one in DCM (10 ml) at 0°C is treated with a solution of mCPBA in DCM (10 ml) and stirred at room temperature.
  • the reaction mixture is cooled to -20°C to form a precipitate which is removed and washed. This is suspended in acetonitrile, and treated with the appropriate secondary amine and stirred at room temperature.
  • the reaction mixture is evaporated in vacuo and re-dissolved in ethyl acetate (100 ml) .
  • This solution is then washed with 50% saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (2 x 100 ml) , dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo.
  • the solid residue is triturated in ether, filtered and the solid collected recrystallised from methanol to provide the desired compound.
  • substituents are desired on the central core of two fused rings, these can be introduced by varying the substituents on the ring of the salicylic acid starting material, using protecting groups where appropriate (e.g. see route 7b) .
  • Steps (a) , (e) and (f) are as for Synthesis Route 7a.
  • substituents are desired on the central core of two fused rings, these can be introduced by varying the substituents on the ring of the acetophenone starting material, for example using 2, 5-dihydroxyacetophenone in place of 2 , 4-dihydroxyacetophenone to generate 6-hydroxy substituted chromen-4-ones .
  • the resin bound chromone (maximum 0.036 mmol) was suspended in DCM (2 ml) and after shaking for 10 min, the mixture was treated with mCPBA (0.2 g, 1.1 mmol). The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 3 hours and then filtered. The resin was washed in order with DCM x 2 , methanol x 2 , DCM x 2 and re-suspended in DCM (2 ml) . After shaking for 15 minutes the mixture was treated with a solution of morpholine (0.005 ml, 0.05 mmol) in DCM (2 ml) . The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 h and filtered, washing the resin with methanol (2 x 2 ml) . The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to provide the title compound. The product was submitted for analysis by LC-MS without further purification.
  • step (b) If the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, than the amine can be used in step (b) in place of morpholine.
  • the 7-substituent may be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, heterocyclyl, etc rather than aryl by using the appropriate alcohol in step (a) .
  • Synthesis route 7c synthesis of 2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen- 4 -ones derivatives
  • the present invention provides active compounds, specifically, active 4-amino-pyran-2-ons, 2-amino-pyran-4-ones, 2-amino-4- ones, and 2-amino-pyridine-isoquinolin-4-ones .
  • active pertains to compounds which are capable of inhibiting DNA-PK activity, and specifically includes both compounds with intrinsic activity (drugs) as well as prodrugs of such compounds, which prodrugs may themselves exhibit little or no intrinsic activity.
  • the present invention further provides a method of inhibiting DNA-PK inhibition in a cell, comprising contacting said cell with an effective amount of an active compound, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable composition. Such a method may be practised in vi tro or in vivo.
  • a sample of cells (e.g. from a tumour) may be grown in vi tro and an active compound brought into contact with said cells in conjunction with agents that have a known curative effect, and the enhancement of the curative effect of the compound on those cells observed.
  • the present invention further provides active compounds which inhibit DNA-PK activity as well as methods of methods of inhibiting DNA-PK activity comprising contacting a cell with an effective amount of an active compound, whether in vi tro ox in vivo .
  • the invention further provides active compounds for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body.
  • a method may comprise administering to such a subject a therapeutically-effective amount of an active compound, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
  • treatment pertains generally to treatment and therapy, whether of a human or an animal (e.g. in veterinary applications) , in which some desired therapeutic effect is achieved, for example, the inhibition of the progress of the condition, and includes a reduction in the rate of progress, a halt in the rate of progress, amelioration of the condition, and cure of the condition.
  • Treatment as a prophylactic measure i.e. prophylaxis is also included.
  • terapéuticaally-effective amount refers to that amount of an active compound, or a material, composition or dosage from comprising an active compound, which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • the active compound or pharmaceutical composition comprising the active compound may be administered to a subject by any convenient route of administration, whether systemically/ peripherally or at the site of desired action, including but not limited to, oral (e.g. by ingestion) ; topical (including e.g. transdermal, intranasal, ocular, buccal, and sublingual); pulmonary (e.g. by inhalation or insufflation therapy using, e.g. an aerosol, e.g.
  • vaginal parenteral, for example, by injection, including subcutaneous, intradermal, intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intracardiac, intrathecal, intraspinal, intracapsular, subcapsular, intraorbital , intraperitoneal , intratracheal , subcuticular, intraarticular, subarachnoid, and intrasternal ; by implant of a depot, for example, subcutaneously or intramuscularly.
  • the subject may be a eukaryote, an animal, a vertebrate animal, a mammal, a rodent (e.g. a guinea pig, a hamster, a rat, a mouse), murine (e.g. a mouse), canine (e.g. a dog), feline (e.g. a cat), equine (e.g. a horse), a primate, simian (e.g. a monkey or ape), a monkey (e.g. marmoset, baboon), an ape (e.g. gorilla, chimpanzee, orang-utan, gibbon), or a human.
  • a rodent e.g. a guinea pig, a hamster, a rat, a mouse
  • murine e.g. a mouse
  • canine e.g. a dog
  • feline e.g. a cat
  • the active compound While it is possible for the active compound to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical composition (e.g. formulation) comprising at least one active compound, as defined above, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, excipients, diluents, fillers, buffers, stabilisers, preservatives, lubricants, or other materials well known to those skilled in the art and optionally other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.
  • a pharmaceutical composition e.g. formulation
  • the present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions, as defined above, and methods of making a pharmaceutical composition comprising admixing at least one active compound, as defined above, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients, buffers, adjuvants, stabilisers, or other materials, as described herein.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable refers to compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgement, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of a subject (e.g. human) without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • a subject e.g. human
  • Each carrier, excipient, etc. must also be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation.
  • Suitable carriers, excipients, etc. can be found in standard pharmaceutical texts, for example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th edition, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1990.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active compound with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active compound with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then if necessary shaping the product .
  • Formulations may be in the form of liquids, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, elixirs, syrups, tablets, losenges, granules, powders, capsules, cachets, pills, ampoules, suppositories, pessaries, ointments, gels, pastes, creams, sprays, mists, foams, lotions, oils, boluses, electuaries, or aerosols .
  • Formulations suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets, each containing a predetermined amount of the active compound; as a powder or granules; as a solution or suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion; as a bolus; as an electuary; or as a paste.
  • a tablet may be made by conventional means, e.g., compression or moulding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients .
  • Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active compound in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with one or more binders (e.g. povidone, gelatin, acacia, sorbitol, tragacanth, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose); fillers or diluents (e.g. lactose, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g. magnesium stearate, talc, silica); disintegrants (e.g.
  • Moulded tablets may be made by moulding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active compound therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile. Tablets may optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration may be formulated as an ointment, cream, suspension, lotion, powder, solution, past, gel, spray, aerosol, or oil.
  • a formulation may comprise a patch or a dressing such as a bandage or adhesive plaster impregnated with active compounds and optionally one or more excipients or diluents .
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include losenges comprising the active compound in a flavoured basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active compound in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active compound in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active compound is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the active compound.
  • Formulations suitable for nasal administration wherein the carrier is a solid, include a coarse powder having a particle size, for example, in the range of about 20 to about 500 microns which is administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e. by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose .
  • Suitable formulations wherein the carrier is a liquid for administration as, for example, nasal spray, nasal drops, or by aerosol administration by nebuliser include aqueous or oily solutions of the active compound.
  • Formulations suitable for administration by inhalation include those presented as an aerosol spray from a pressurised pack, with the use of a suitable propellant, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichoro- tetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide, or other suitable gases.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration via the skin include ointments, creams, and emulsions.
  • the active compound When formulated in an ointment, the active compound may optionally be employed with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active compounds may be formulated in a cream with an oil-in-water cream base.
  • the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least about 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane-1 , 3-diol , mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • the topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active compound through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethylsulfoxide and related analogues.
  • the oily phase may optionally comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent) , or it may comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil.
  • an emulsifier otherwise known as an emulgent
  • a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabiliser. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat.
  • the emulsifier (s) with or without stabiliser (s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax
  • the wax together with the oil and/or fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations.
  • Suitable emulgents and emulsion stabilisers include Tween 60 , Span 80, cetostearyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate and sodium lauryl sulphate.
  • the choice of suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties, since the solubility of the active compound in most oils likely to be used in pharmaceutical emulsion formulations may be very low.
  • the cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non-staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers.
  • Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required.
  • mono-isoadipate such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the
  • high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils can be used.
  • Formulations suitable for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the active compound, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate .
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous isotonic, pyrogen-free, sterile injection solutions which may contain anti-oxidants, buffers, preservatives, stabilisers, bacteriostats, and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents, and liposomes or other microparticulate systems which are designed to target the compound to blood components or one or more organs.
  • Suitable isotonic vehicles for use in such formulations include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Solution, or Lactated Ringer's Injection.
  • concentration of the active compound in the solution is from about 1 ng/ml to about 10 ⁇ g/ml, for example from about 10 ng/ml to about 1 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the formulations may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilised) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use.
  • Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets.
  • Formulations may be in the form of liposomes or other microparticulate systems which are designed to target the active compound to blood components or one or more organs .
  • appropriate dosages of the active compounds, and compositions comprising the active compounds can vary from patient to patient. Determining the optimal dosage will generally involve the balancing of the level of therapeutic benefit against any risk or deleterious side effects of the treatments of the present invention.
  • the selected dosage level will depend on a variety of factors including, but not limited to, the activity of the particular compound, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the compound, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds, and/or materials used in combination, and the age, sex, weight, condition, general health, and prior medical history of the patient.
  • the amount of compound and route of administration will ultimately be at the discretion of the physician, although generally the dosage will be to achieve local concentrations at the site of action which achieve the desired effect without causing substantial harmful or deleterious side-effects .
  • Administration in vivo can be effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently (e.g. in divided doses at appropriate intervals) throughout the course of treatment.
  • Methods of determining the most effective means and dosage of administration are well known to those of skill in the art and will vary with the formulation used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target cell being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations can be carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician.
  • a suitable dose of the active compound is in the range of about 100 ⁇ g to about 250 mg per kilogram body weight of the subject per day.
  • the active compound is a salt, an ester, prodrug, or the like
  • the amount administered is calculated on the basis of the parent compound and so the actual weight to be used is increased proportionately.
  • Mw molecular weight
  • Brown oil (3.84g, 68%) from (4.91g, 25mmol) of 3-phenyl-3- hydroxy-dithioacrylic acid;
  • FT-IR ATR/cm -1
  • X H NMR 1.31 (3H, t) , 3.20 (2H, q) , 6.84 (IH, s) , 7.34-7.83 (5H, m) , 15.06 (IH, s)
  • Examples of compounds synthesised using synthetic route 3 and synthetic route 4 are listed in the following table.
  • An asterix on the structure indicates the place at which the substituent and core structure are joined. So, for example, a
  • core structure of defines a compound
  • the wavey bonds, m the structures of compounds 27 and 28 indicate a bond pointing either up or down (axial or equatorial positions) .
  • the structures therefore represent a dimethylmorpholino group having a mixture of cis and trans methyl groups .
  • the ethereal extracts were dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo to give a yellow liquid.
  • the crude product was dissolved in petrol and loaded onto a silica flash column. The column was eluted with petrol, followed by 5-10% ethyl acetate in petrol. The second product collected was evaporated in vacuo and then recrystallised from petrol to provide a white crystalline solid (1.35 g, 5.90 mmol, 56% yield).
  • Propylene oxide (2.32 g, 0.04 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of ethanolamine (10.0 g, 0.16 mmol) in water (50 ml) at 0 °C, and the solution stirred at room temperature for 5 h. Water was removed by evaporation in vaccuo resulting in a colourless oil which was then distilled under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as a colourless oil.
  • Tosyl chloride (11.60 g, 60.80 mmol) was added in small portions to a stirred solution of 1- (2-Hydroxy-ethylamino) - propan-2-ol (3.60 g, 30.25 mmol) in anhydrous pyridine at 0 °C.
  • the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 24 h and then poured onto ice-water (200 ml) .
  • the mixture was extracted into DCM ( 100 ml) .
  • the organic extract was washed with 2N HCI, water, and was evaporated in vaccuo to give a brown residue which was used without further purification.
  • Examples of compounds synthesised using a variant of route 7b in which a 2 , 5-dihydroxyacetophenone starting material was used in place of 2 , 4-dihydroxyacetophenone include the following: 6-Hydroxy-2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 343)
  • DNA-PK inhibition In order to assess the inhibitory action of the compounds against DNA-PK in vi tro, the following assay was used to determine IC 50 values.
  • Mammalian DNA-PK isolated from Hela cell nuclear extract (Gell, D. and Jackson S.P., Nucleic Acids Res . 27:3494-3502 (1999) ) , was incubated with Z buffer (25 mM Hepes (Sigma) ; 12.5 mM MgCl 2 (Sigma); 50 mM KC1 (Sigma); lmM DTT (Sigma); 10% Glycerol (Sigma); 0. 1% NP-40 (Sigma); pH 7.4) in polypropylene 96 well plates and varying concentrations of inhibitor added. All compounds were diluted in DMSO to give a final assay concentration of between 10 and 0.001 ⁇ M, with DMSO being at a final concentration of 1% per well. The total assay volume per well was 40 ⁇ l.
  • the plates were transferred to a TopCount NXT (TRADE MARK) (Packard, UK) for scintillation counting. Values recorded are counts per minute (cpm) following a 1 minute counting time for each well .

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Heterocyclic Carbon Compounds Containing A Hetero Ring Having Nitrogen And Oxygen As The Only Ring Hetero Atoms (AREA)
  • Pyrane Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to the use of compounds of formula (I) and isomers, salts, solvates, chemically protected forms, and prodrugs thereof, in the preparation of a medicament for inhibiting the activity of DNA-PK, wherein R?1 and R2¿ are independently hydrogen, an optionally substituted C¿1-7? alkyl group, C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or C5-20 aryl group, or may together form, along with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 ring atoms; X and Y are selected from CR?4¿ and O, O and CR'4 and NR'4 and N, where the unsaturation is in the appropriate place in the ring, and where one of R?3 and R4 or R'4¿ is an optionally substituted C¿3-20? heteroaryl or C5-20 aryl group, and the other of R?3 and R4 or R'4¿ is H, or R?3 and R4 or R'4¿ together are -A-B-, which collectively represent a fused optionally substituted aromatic ring. The compounds also selectively inhibit the activity of DNA-PK compared to PI 3-kinase and/or ATM.

Description

DNA-PK INHIBITORS
The present invention relates to compounds which act as DNA-PK inhibitors, their use and synthesis.
The DNA-dependent protein kinase (DNA-PK) is a nuclear serine/threonine protein kinase that is activated upon association with DNA. Biochemical and genetic data have revealed this kinase to be composed of a large catalytic subunit, termed DNA-PKcs, and a regulatory component termed Ku. DNA-PK has been shown to be a crucial component of both the DNA double-strand break (DSB) repair machinery and the V(D)J recombination apparatus. In addition, recent work has implicated DNA-PK components in a variety of other processes, including the modulation of chromatin structure and telomere maintenance (Smith, G. C. M. and Jackson, S.P., Genes and Dev. 13: 916-934 (1999) ) .
Human DNA is constantly under attack from reactive oxygen intermediates principally from by-products of the oxidative metabolism we have evolved for energy supply. Reactive oxygen species are capable of producing DNA single-strand breaks and, where two of these are generated in close proximity, DNA double strand breaks (DSBs) . In addition, single- and double- strand breaks can be induced when a DNA replication fork encounters a damaged template, and are generated by exogenous agents such as ionising radiation (IR) and certain anti-cancer drugs (e.g. bleomycin) . DSBs also occur as intermediates in site-specific V(D)J recombination, a process that is critical for the generation of a functional vertebrate immune system. If DNA DSBs are left unrepaired or are repaired inaccurately, mutations and/or chromosomal aberrations are induced, which in turn may lead to cell death. To combat the serious threats posed by DNA DSBs, eukaryotic cells have evolved several mechanisms to mediate their repair. In higher eukaryotes, the predominant of these mechanisms is DNA non-homologous end- joining (NHEJ) , also known as illegitimate recombination. DNA-PK plays a key role in this pathway.
Biochemical studies on DNA-PK revealed that it is activated most potently by DNA DSBs, suggesting that it might play a role in recognising DNA damage. This stimulated investigations into the potential role of DNA-PKcs and Ku in DNA repair and led to the identification of cell lines which are radiosensitive due to mutations in DNA-PK components (Smith and Jackson, 1999) . Cloning of the DNA-PKcs cDNA revealed that it corresponds to a -470 kDa polypeptide, the N- terminal -3500 amino acid residues of which does not appear to have significant homology to other characterised proteins (Hartley, K.O., et al . , Cell 82: 849-856 (1995)). More significantly, the C-terminal -500 amino acid residues of DNA- PKcs comprises a catalytic domain that falls into the PI 3- kinase family. Although this initially suggested that DNA-PK might be capable of phosphorylating inositol phospho-lipids, like certain well-characterised members of the PI 3-kinase family (Toker, A. and Cantley, L.C., Nature 387: 673-676 (1997) ) , the available evidence indicates that DNA-PK has protein but not lipid kinase activity (Hartley et al . 1995;
Smith et al . , 1999) . At a similar time to the cloning of the DNA-PKcs cDNA, the genes and cDNAs for a range of other large PI 3-kinase like (PIK ) proteins were identified and cloned (Jackson, S.P., Cancer Surv. 28: 261-279 (1996)). These proteins have been shown to be involved in controlling transcription, the cell-cycle and/or genome stability in organisms from yeast to man. DNA-PKcs appears to be restricted to higher eukaryotes. Besides DNA-PKcs, probably the best characterised member of the PIKL family is ATM, the protein deficient in the human neurodegenerative and cancer predisposition condition ataxia- telangiectasia (A-T; avin, M.F. and Shiloh,Y., Annu . Rev.
Immunol . 15: 177-202 (1997)). ATM has been linked intimately to the detection and signalling of DNA damage.
It also has been previously found that the PI 3-kinase inhibitor LY294002:
Figure imgf000005_0001
is able to inhibit DNA-PK function in vi tro (Izzard, R.A., et al . , Cancer Res . 59: 2581-2586 (1999)). The IC50 (concentration at which 50% of enzyme activity is lost) for LY294002 towards DNA-PK is, at ~lμM, the same as that for PI
3-kinase. Furthermore it has been shown that LY294002 is also able to weakly sensitise cells to the effects of IR (Rosenzweig, K.E., et al . , Clin. Cancer Res . 3: 1149-1156 (1999) ) .
Given the involvement of DNA-PK in DNA repair processes, and that LY294002 has been shown to radiosensitise mammalian cells in culture, an application of (specific) DNA-PK inhibitory drugs would be to act as agents that will enhance the efficacy of both cancer chemotherapy and radiotherapy. DNA-PK inhibitors may also prove useful in the treatment of retroviral mediated diseases. For example it has been demonstrated that loss of DNA-PK activity severely represses the process of retroviral integration (Daniel R, et al . , Science, 284:644-7 (1999)). DNA-PK inhibitors may also have potential as modulators of the immune system. DNA-PK has also been shown to play an important role in telomere maintenance, and hence inhibitors of DNA-PK may play a role in modulating telomere functions (Goytisolo, et al , Mol . Cell . Biol . , 21:3642-3651 (2001) .
The present inventors have now discovered compounds which exhibit inhibition of DNA-PK; these compounds also exhibit selective inhibition of DNA-PK over the PI 3-kinase family members PI 3-kinase and ATM.
Accordingly, the first aspect of the invention provides for the use of compounds of formula I :
Figure imgf000006_0001
(I)
and isomers, salts, solvates, chemically protected forms, and prodrugs thereof, in the preparation of a medicament for inhibiting the activity of DNA-PK, wherein: R1 and R2 are independently hydrogen, an optionally substituted Cχ-7 alkyl group, C3-2o heterocyclyl group, or C5_2o aryl group, or may together form, along with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 ring atoms ; X and Y are selected from CR4 and O, O and CR'4 and NR"4 and N, where the unsaturation is in the appropriate place in the ring, and where one of R3 and R4 or R'4 is an optionally substituted C3-2o heteroaryl or C5-20 aryl group, and the other of R3 and R4 or R'4 is H, or R3 and R4 or R"4 together are -A-B- , which collectively represent a fused optionally substituted aromatic ring; except that when X and Y are CR4 and O, R3 and R4 together form a fused benzene ring, and R1 and R2 together with the N to which they are attached form a morpholino group, then the fused benzene does not bear as a sole substituent a phenyl substituent at the 8- position.
Thus, the three different possibilities for X and Y results in compounds of formulae la, lb and lc:
Figure imgf000007_0001
(la) (lb) (lc)
One aspect of the first aspect of the present invention relates to compounds of formulae la or lb, where one R3 and R4 (or R'4) is a C3_20 heteroaryl or Cs_20 aryl group, and the other of R3 and R4 (or R'4) is H.
Another aspect of the first aspect of the present invention relates to compounds of formulae la and lc, where R3 and R4 or R"4 together are -A-B-, which collectively represent a fused optionally substituted aromatic ring, with the proviso given above . It is preferred that the medicament of the first aspect selectivity inhibits the activity of DNA-PK compared to PI 3- kinase and/or ATM. Selectivity is an important issue as inhibition of other PI 3-kinase family members may lead to unwanted side-effects associated with the loss of function of those enzymes .
A second aspect of the invention provides for the use of compounds as defined in the first aspect of the invention in the preparation of a medicament for use as an adjunct in cancer therapy or for potentiating tumour cells for treatment with ionising radiation or chemotherapeutic agents.
A third aspect of the invention provides for the use of compounds in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of retroviral mediated diseases or disease ameliorated by the inhibition of DNA-PK.
A further aspect of the invention provides an active compound as described herein for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
Another aspect of the invention provides a method of inhibiting DNA-PK in vi tro or in vivo, comprising contacting a cell with an effective amount of an active compound as described herein.
A further aspect of the present invention provides novel compounds as described herein. Defini tions
The term "aromatic ring" is used herein in the conventional sense to refer to cyclic aromatic rings, that is, cyclic structures having 5 to 7 atoms in a ring with delocalised π-electron orbitals. Preferably, aromatic rings are those which meet Hύckel's 4n+2 rule, ie . where the number of π- electrons is 4n+2 , n representing the number of ring atoms. It is preferred that the aromatic ring has six atoms. In such a case, it is further preferred that the four atoms additional to the core moiety that make up the aromatic ring are all carbon, which yields compounds of the following general structure :
Figure imgf000009_0001
wherein X' and Y' are either C and O or N and N, respectively; and where R5, R6, R7, and R8 are preferably independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-7 alkyl, C3-2o heterocyclyl, C5-2o aryl, hydroxy, Cι_7 alkoxy (including Cχ_7 alkyl-Cι_7 alkoxy and C3-2o aryl-Cx-7 alkoxy) and acyloxy or adjacent pairs of substituents (i.e. R5 and R6, R6 and R7, R7 and R8) form, together with the atoms to which they are attached, an optionally substituted aromatic or carbocyclic ring.
The fused aromatic ring represented by -A-B- may be substituted by one or more of the following groups: CX-7 alkyl, C3-2o heterocyclyl, C5-20 aryl, hydroxy, C1-7 alkoxy (including Ci- 7 alkyl-Ci-7 alkoxy and C3-20 aryl-Cι-7 alkoxy) and acyloxy; adjacent pairs of substituents may form, together with the atoms to which they are attached, an optionally substituted aromatic or carbocyclic ring.
The term carbocyclic ring refers to a ring formed from 5 to 7 covalently linked carbon atoms. The ring may contain one or more carbon-carbon double bonds. Examples of carbocyclic rings include cyclopentane, cyclohexane, cycloheptane, cyclopentene, cyclohexene and cycloheptene .
Ci-7 alkyl : The term "Cι-7 alkyl" , as used herein, pertains to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a Ci-7 hydrocarbon compound having from 1 to 7 carbon atoms, which may be aliphatic or alicyclic, or a combination thereof, and which may be saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated.
Examples of saturated linear C .7 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, and n-pentyl (amyl) .
Examples of saturated branched Cχ-7 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, iso-propyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, and neo-pentyl.
Examples of saturated alicyclic Cι-7 alkyl groups (also referred to as "C3-7 cycloalkyl" groups) include, but are not limited to, groups such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl, as well as substituted groups (e.g., groups which comprise such groups), such as methylcyclopropyl , dimethylcyclopropyl , methylcyclobutyl, dimethylcyclobutyl, methylcyclopentyl, dimethylcyclopentyl, methylcyclohexyl, dimethylcyclohexyl, cyclopropylmethyl and cyclohexylmethyl . Examples of unsaturated Cι-7 alkyl groups which have one or more carbon-carbon double bonds (also referred to as "C2-7alkenyl" groups) include, but are not limited to, ethenyl (vinyl, - CH=CH2) , 2-propenyl (allyl, -CH-CH=CH2) , isopropenyl (-C (CH3) =CH2) , butenyl, pentenyl , and hexenyl .
Examples of unsaturated Cχ-7 alkyl groups which have one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds (also referred to as "C2-7 alkynyl" groups) include, but are not limited to, ethynyl (ethinyl) and 2-propynyl (propargyl) .
Examples of unsaturated alicyclic (carbocyclic) Cι_7 alkyl groups which have one or more carbon-carbon double bonds (also referred to as "C3_7cycloalkenyl" groups) include, but are not limited to, unsubstituted groups such as cyclopropenyl , cyclobutenyl , cyclopentenyl, and cyclohexenyl , as well as substituted groups (e.g., groups which comprise such groups) such as cyclopropenylmethyl and cyclohexenylmethyl .
C3_20 heterocyclyl : The term "C3_20 heterocyclyl " , as used herein, pertains to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a ring atom of a C3_20 heterocyclic compound, said compound having one ring, or two or more rings (e.g., spiro, fused, bridged) , and having from 3 to 20 ring atoms, atoms, of which from 1 to 10 are ring heteroatoms, and wherein at least one of said ring(s) is a heterocyclic ring. Preferably, each ring has from 3 to 7 ring atoms, of which from 1 to 4 are ring heteroatoms. "C3_2o" denotes ring atoms, whether carbon atoms or heteroatoms .
Examples of C3-20 heterocyclyl groups having one nitrogen ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidines (tetrahydropyrrole) , pyrroline (e.g., 3-pyrroline, 2 , 5-dihydropyrrole) , 2H-pyrrole or 3H-pyrrole (isopyrrole, isoazole) , piperidine, dihydropyridine, tetrahydropyridine, and azepine.
Examples of C3_20 heterocyclyl groups having one oxygen ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from oxirane, oxetane, oxolane (tetrahydrofuran) , oxole (dihydrofuran) , oxane (tetrahydropyran) , dihydropyran, pyran (C6) , and oxepin. Examples of substituted C3.2o heterocyclyl groups include sugars, in cyclic form, for example, furanoses and pyranoses, including, for example, ribose, lyxose, xylose, galactose, sucrose, fructose, and arabinose.
Examples of C3.2o heterocyclyl groups having one sulphur ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from thiirane, thietane, thiolane (tetrahydrothiophene) , thiane (tetrahydrothiopyran) , and thiepane.
Examples of C3_20 heterocyclyl groups having two oxygen ring atoms include, but are not limited to, those derived from dioxolane, dioxane, and dioxepane.
Examples of C3_20 heterocyclyl groups having two nitrogen ring atoms include, but are not limited to, those derived from imidazolidine, pyrazolidine (diazolidine) , imidazoline, pyrazoline (dihydropyrazole) , and piperazine.
Examples of C3.2o heterocyclyl groups having one nitrogen ring atom and one oxygen ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from tetrahydrooxazole, dihydrooxazole, tetrahydroisoxazole, dihydroisoxazole, morpholine, tetrahydrooxazine, dihydrooxazine, and oxazine. Examples of C3_20 heterocyclyl groups having one oxygen ring atom and one sulphur ring atom include, but are not limited to, those derived from oxathiolane and oxathiane (thioxane) .
Examples of C3-2o heterocyclyl groups having one nitrogen ring atom and one sulphur ring atom include, but are not limited to, those .derived from thiazoline, thiazolidine, and thiomorpholine .
Other examples of C3-20heterocyclyl groups include, but are not limited to, oxadiazine and oxathiazine.
Examples of heterocyclyl groups which additionally bear one or more oxo (=0) groups, include, but are not limited to, those derived from:
C5 heterocyclics, such as furanone, pyrone, pyrrolidone
(pyrrolidinone) , pyrazolone (pyrazolinone) , imidazolidone, thiazolone, and isothiazolone;
C6 heterocyclics, such as piperidinone (piperidone) , piperidinedione, piperazinone, piperazinedione, pyridazinone, and pyrimidinone (e.g., cytosine, thymine, uracil) , and barbituric acid; fused heterocyclics, such as oxindole, purinone (e.g., guanine), benzoxazolinone, benzopyrone (e.g., coumarin) ; cyclic anhydrides (-C (=0) -0-C (=0) - in a ring), including but not limited to maleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, and glutaric anhydride; cyclic carbonates (-0-C(=0)-0- in a ring), such as ethylene carbonate and 1, 2 -propylene carbonate; imides (-C (=0) -NR-C (=0) - in a ring), including but not limited to, succinimide, maleimide, phthalimide, and glutarimide; lactones (cyclic esters, -0-C(=0)- in a ring), including, but not limited to, β-propiolactone, γ-butyrolactone, δ-valerolactone (2-piperidone) , and ε-caprolactone; lacta s (cyclic amides, -NR-C(=0)- in a ring), including, but not limited to, β-propiolactam, γ-butyrolactam (2-pyrrolidone) , δ-valerolactam, and ε-caprolactam; cyclic carbamates (-0-C (=0) -NR- in a ring), such as 2-oxazolidone; cyclic ureas (-NR-C (=0) -NR- in a ring), such as 2-imidazolidone and pyrimidine-2 , 4-dione (e.g., thymine, uracil) .
C5-2o ryl: The term "C5-2o aryl", as used herein, pertains to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an aromatic ring atom of a C5.2o aromatic compound, said compound having one ring, or two or more rings (e.g., fused), and having from 5 to 20 ring atoms, and wherein at least one of said ring(s) is an aromatic ring. Preferably, each ring has from 5 to 7 ring atoms .
The ring atoms may be all carbon atoms, as in "carboaryl groups" , in which case the group may conveniently be referred to as a nC5-20 carboaryl" group.
Examples of C5-2o aryl groups which do not have ring heteroatoms (i.e. C5-20 carboaryl groups) include, but are not limited to, those derived from benzene (i.e. phenyl) (C6) , naphthalene (C10) anthracene (Ci4) , phenanthrene (Ci4) , naphthacene (C18) , and pyrene (C16) .
Examples of aryl groups which comprise fused rings, one of which is not an aromatic ring, include, but are not limited to, groups derived from indene and fluorene . Alternatively, the ring atoms may include one or more heteroatoms, including but not limited to oxygen, nitrogen, and sulphur, as in "heteroaryl groups" . In this case, the group may conveniently be referred to as a "C5_2o heteroaryl" group, wherein "C5-20" denotes ring atoms, whether carbon atoms or heteroatoms. Preferably, each ring has from 5 to 7 ring atoms, of which from 0 to 4 are ring heteroatoms.
Examples of C5_2o heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, C5 heteroaryl groups derived from furan (oxole) , thiophene (thiole) , pyrrole (azole) , imidazole (1, 3-diazole) , pyrazole (1, 2-diazole) , triazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, oxadiazole, and oxatriazole; and Cg heteroaryl groups derived from isoxazine, pyridine (azine) , pyridazine (1, 2-diazine) , pyrimidine (1, 3-diazine; e.g., cytosine, thymine, uracil) , pyrazine (1, -diazine) , triazine, tetrazole, and oxadiazole (furazan) .
Examples of C5-20 heterocyclic groups (some of which are C5-20 heteroaryl groups) which comprise fused rings, include, but are not limited to, C9 heterocyclic groups derived from benzofuran, isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, purine (e.g., adenine, guanine) , benzothiophene, benzimidazole; Cχ0 heterocyclic groups derived from quinoline, isoquinoline, benzodiazine, pyridopyridine, quinoxaline; C13 heterocyclic groups derived from carbazole, dibenzothiophene, dibenzofuran; Cι heterocyclic groups derived from acridine, xanthene, phenoxathiin, phenazine, phenoxazine, phenothiazine.
The above Cι_7 alkyl, C3_2o heterocyclyl, and C5_20 aryl groups, whether alone or part of another substituent, may themselves optionally be substituted with one or more groups selected from themselves and the additional substituents listed below.
Halo: -F, -Cl, -Br, and -I.
Hydroxy: -OH.
Ether: -OR, wherein R is an ether substituent, for example, a Cι-7 alkyl group (also referred to as a Cι_ alkoxy group, discussed below) , a C3-2o heterocyclyl group (also referred to as a C3-20 heterocyclyloxy group) , or a C5-20 aryl group (also referred to as a C5-2o aryloxy group) , preferably a C1-7 alkyl group .
Cι_7 alkoxy: -OR, wherein R is a C .η alkyl group. Examples of Cι_7 alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OCH3 (methoxy) , -OCH2CH3 (ethoxy) and -OC(CH3)3 (tert-butoxy) .
Oxo (keto, -one) : =0. Examples of cyclic compounds and/or groups having, as a substituent, an oxo group (=0) include, but are not limited to, carbocyclics such as cyclopentanone and cyclohexanone; heterocyclics, such as pyrone, pyrrolidone, pyrazolone, pyrazolinone, piperidone, piperidinedione, piperazinedione, and imidazolidone; cyclic anhydrides, including but not limited to maleic anhydride and succinic anhydride; cyclic carbonates, such as propylene carbonate; imides, including but not limited to, succinimide and maleimide; lactones (cyclic esters, -0-C(=0)- in a ring), including, but not limited to, β-propiolactone, γ-butyrolactone, δ-valerolactone, and ε-caprolactone; and lactams (cyclic amides, -NH-C(=0)- in a ring), including, but not limited to, β-propiolactam, γ-butyrolactam (2- pyrrolidone) , δ-valerolactam, and ε-caprolactam. Imino (imine) : =NR, wherein R is an imino substituent, for example, hydrogen, Cι-7 alkyl group, a C3-2oheterocyclyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C_7 alkyl group. Examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to, =NH, =NMe, =NEt, and =NPh.
Formyl (carbaldehyde, carboxaldehyde) : -C(=0)H.
Acyl (keto) : -C(=0)R, wherein R is an acyl substituent, for example, a C1-7alkyl group (also referred to as Cx_7 alkylacyl or Cχ-7 alkanoyl) , a C3-2o heterocyclyl group (also referred to as C3-20 heterocyclylacyl) , or a CS-20 aryl group (also referred to as C5-20 arylacyl) , preferably a Cχ_7 alkyl group. Examples of acyl groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=0)CH3
(acetyl), -C(=0)CH2CH3 (propionyl) , -C (=0) C (CH3) 3 (butyryl) , and -C(=0)Ph (benzoyl, phenone) .
Carboxy (carboxylic acid) : -C00H.
Ester (carboxylate, carboxylic acid ester, oxycarbonyl) : -C(=0)OR, wherein R is an ester substituent, for example, a C1-7 alkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably a Cχ-7alkyl group. Examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=0)OCH3, -C (=0) OCH2CH3, -C(=0)0C(CH3)3, and -C(=0)0Ph.
Acyloxy (reverse ester): -0C(=0)R, wherein R is an acyloxy substituent, for example, a Cχ-7 alkyl group, a C3.2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5_20 aryl group, preferably a Cχ-7alkyl group. Examples of acyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OC(=0)CH3 (acetoxy) , -OC (=0) CH2CH3, -OC (=0) C (CH3) 3, -0C(=0)Ph, and -OC (=0) CH2Ph. Amido (carbamoyl, carbamyl, aminocarbonyl , carboxamide) : -C(=0)NR1R2, wherein R1 and R2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups. Examples of amido groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=0)NH2, -C(=0)NHCH3, -C(=0)N(CH3)2, -C(=0)NHCH2CH3, and -C (=0) N(CH2CH3) 2, as well as amido groups in which R1 and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic structure as in, for example, piperidinocarbonyl , morpholinocarbonyl , thiomorpholinocarbonyl, and piperazinocarbonyl .
Acylamido (acylamino) : -NRxC(=0)R2, wherein R1 is an amide substituent, for example, hydrogen, a Cχ_7 alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C-7 alkyl group, and R2 is an acyl substituent, for example, a Cχ_7 alkyl group, la C3_2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5-2o aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C1- alkyl group. Examples of acylamide groups include, but are not limited to, -NHC(=0)CH3 , -NHC(=0)CH2CH3, and -NHC(=0)Ph. R1 and R2 may together form a cyclic structure, .as in, for example, succinimidyl , maleimidyl and phthalimidyl :
Figure imgf000018_0001
succinimidyl maleimidyl phthalimidyl
Acylureido: -N (R1) C (0)NR2C (0) R3 wherein R1 and R2 are independently ureido substituents, for example, hydrogen, a Cχ_7 alkyl group, a C3_2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5-2o aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a Cχ-7 alkyl group. R3 is an acyl group as defined for acyl groups. Examples of acylureido groups include, but are not limited to, -NHCONHC (O) H, - NHCONMeC(θ)H, -NHCONEtC (O) H, -NHCONMeC (O) Me, -NHCONEtC (0) Et, - NMeCONHC(0)Et, -NMeCONHC (O) Me, -NMeCONHC (O) Et , - NMeCONMeC(0)Me, -NMeCONEtC (O) Et , and -NMeCONHC (O) Ph.
Carbamate: -NR1-C (O) -OR2 wherein R1 is an amino substituent as defined for amino groups and R2 is an ester group as defined for ester groups. Examples of carbamate groups include, but are not limited to, -NH-C (O) -O-Me, -NMe-C (O) -O-Me, -NH-C(0)-0- Et, -NMe-C (0) -O-t-butyl, and -NH-C (O) -O-Ph.
Thioa ido (thiocarbamyl) : -C(=S)NR1R2, wherein R1 and R2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups. Examples of amido groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=S)NH2, -C(=S)NHCH3, -C (=S) N (CH3) 2, and -C (=S) NHCH2CH3.
Tetrazolyl : a five membered aromatic ring having four nitrogen atoms and one carbon atom,
Figure imgf000019_0001
Amino: -NRXR2, wherein R1 and R2 are independently amino substituents, for example, hydrogen, a Cχ_7 alkyl group (also referred to as Cχ_7 alkylamino or di-Cχ-7 alkylamino) , a C3_2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5-2o aryl group, preferably H or a Cχ_7alkyl group, or, in the case of a "cyclic" amino group, R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 ring atoms. Examples of amino groups include, but are not limited to, -NH2, -NHCH3, -NHC(CH3)2, -N(CH3)2, -N(CH2CH3)2, and -NHPh. Examples of cyclic amino groups include, but are not limited to, aziridino, azetidino, pyrrolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, and thiomorpholino .
Imino: =NR, wherein R is an imino substituent, for example, for example, hydrogen, a Cχ_7 alkyl group, a C3_20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5-2o aryl group, preferably H or a C1-7 alkyl group.
Amidine: -C(=NR)NR2, wherein each R is an amidine substituent, for example, hydrogen, a Cχ-7 alkyl group, a C3_20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5_20 aryl group, preferably H or a Cχ-7 alkyl group. An example of an amidine group is -C(=NH)NH2.
Carbazoyl (hydrazinocarbonyl) : -C(0)-NN-R1 wherein R1 is an amino substituent as defined for amino groups . Examples of azino groups include, but are not limited to, -C (O) -NN-H, - C(0)-NN-Me, -C(0)-NN-Et, -C(0)-NN-Ph, and -C (O) -NN-CH2-Ph.
Nitro : -N02.
Nitroso: -NO.
Azido : -N3.
Cyano (nitrile, carbonitrile) : -CN.
Isocyano: -NC.
Cyanato: -OCN.
Isocyanato: -NCO .
Thiocyano (thiocyanato) : -SCN. Isothiocyano (isothiocyanato) : -NCS .
Sulfhydryl (thiol, mercapto) : -SH.
Thioether (sulfide) : -SR, wherein R is a thioether substituent, for example, a Cχ_7 alkyl group (also referred to as a Cχ-7 alkylthio group) , a C3.20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5_20 aryl group, preferably a C-7 alkyl group. Examples of C_7 alkylthio groups include, but are not limited to, -SCH3 and -SCH2CH3.
Disulfide: -SS-R, wherein R is a disulfide substituent, for example, a Cx_7 alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5-2o aryl group, preferably a Cχ_7 alkyl group (also referred to herein as Cχ_7 alkyl disulfide) . Examples of Cχ_7 alkyl disulfide groups include, but are not limited to, -SSCH3 and — SCH2 H3.
Sulfone (sulfonyl) : -S(=0)2R, wherein R is a sulfone substituent, for example, a Cχ_7 alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5.2o aryl group, preferably a C_7 alkyl group. Examples of sulfone groups include, but are not limited to, -S(=0)2CH3 (methanesulfonyl , mesyl) , -S(=0)2CF3 (triflyl) , -S (=0) 2CH2CH3, -S(=0)2C4F9 (nonaflyl) , -S (=0) 2CH2CF3 (tresyl) , -S(=0)2Ph (phenylsulfonyl) , 4-methylphenylsulfonyl (tosyl) , 4-bromophenylsulfonyl (brosyl) , and 4-nitrophenyl (nosyl) .
Sulfine (sulfinyl, sulfoxide) : -S(=0)R, wherein R is a sulfine substituent, for example, a Cχ_7 alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5.2o aryl group, preferably a C_7 alkyl group. Examples of sulfine groups include, but are not limited to, -S(=0)CH3 and -S (=0) CH2CH3. Sulfonyloxy: -OS(=0)2R, wherein R is a sulfonyloxy substituent, for example, a Cχ_7 alkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5_2o aryl group, preferably a Cχ_7 alkyl group. Examples of sulfonyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OS(=0)2CH3 and -OS(=0)2CH2CH3.
Sulfinyloxy: -OS(=0)R, wherein R is a sulfinyloxy substituent, for example, a Cχ-7 alkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably a Cχ-7 alkyl group. Examples of sulfinyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OS(=0)CH3 and -OS(=0)CH2CH3.
Sulfamino: -NR1S (=0) 2OH, wherein R1 is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups. Examples of sulfamino groups include, but are not limited to, -NHS(=0)2OH and -N(CH3)S(=0)2OH.
Sulfonamino: -NRxS(=0)2R, wherein R1 is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups, and R is a sulfonamino substituent, for example, a C1-7 alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5_2o aryl group, preferably a Cχ_7 alkyl group. Examples of sulfonamino groups include, but are not limited to, -NHS(=0)2CH3 and -N(CH3) S (=0) 2C6H5.
Sulfinamino: -NRxS(=0)R, wherein R1 is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups, and R is a sulfinamino substituent, for example, a Cχ-7 alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably a Cχ_7 alkyl group. Examples of sulfinamino groups include, but are not limited to, -NHS(=0)CH3 and -N(CH3)S(=0)CsH5. Sulfamyl: -S (=0)NR1R2, wherein R1 and R2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups. Examples of sulfamyl groups include, but are not limited to, -S(=0)NH2, -S(=0)NH(CH3) , -S(=0)N(CH3)2, -S (=0) NH (CH2CH3) , -S (=0) N (CH2CH3) 2, and -S(=0)NHPh.
Sulfonamino: -NR1S(=0)2R, wherein R1 is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups, and R is a sulfonamino substituent, for example, a Cχ-7 alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably a Cχ-7 alkyl group. Examples of sulfonamino groups include, but are not limited to, -NHS(=0)2CH3 and -N (CH3) S (=0) 2C6H5. A special class of sulfonamino groups are those derived from sultams - in these groups one of R1 and R is a C5_20 aryl group, preferably phenyl, whilst the other of R1 and R is a bidentate group which links to the C5-20 aryl group, such as a bidentate group derived from a Cχ_7 alkyl group. Examples of such groups include, but are not limited to:
Figure imgf000023_0001
2, 3-dihydro-tenzo [d] isothiazole-1, l-dioxide-2-yl
Figure imgf000023_0002
1,3-dihydro-benzo [c] isothiazole-2, 2-dioxide-1-yl
Figure imgf000024_0001
3 , 4-dihydro-2H-benzo [e] [1,2] thiazine-1, l-dioxide-2-yl
Phosphoramidite: -OP (OR1) -NR2 2, where R1 and R2 are phosphoramidite substituents, for example, -H, a (optionally substituted) Cχ_7 alkyl group, a C3_20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5_2o aryl group, preferably -H, a Cχ-7 alkyl group, or a C5-2o aryl group. Examples of phosphoramidite groups include, but are not limited to, -OP (OCH2CH3) -N (CH3) 2, -OP (OCH2CH3) -N (i-Pr) 2, and -OP (OCH2CH2CN) -N(i-Pr)2.
Phosphoramidate: -OP(=0) (ORx)-NR2 2, where R1 and R2 are phosphoramidate substituents, for example, -H, a (optionally substituted) Cχ_7 alkyl group, a C3_2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5_20 aryl group, preferably -H, a Cχ-7 alkyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group. Examples of phosphoramidate groups include, but are not limited to, -OP (=0) (OCH2CH3) -N (CH3) 2, -OP (=0) (OCH2CH3) - N(i-Pr)2, and -OP (=0) (OCH2CH2CN) -N (i-Pr) 2.
In many cases, substituents may themselves be substituted. For example, a Cχ_7 alkoxy group may be substituted with, for example, a Cχ-7 alkyl (also referred to as a Cχ_7 alkyl-Cχ-7alkoxy group) , for example, cyclohexylmethoxy, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group (also referred to as a C5_20 aryl-Cχ-7 alkoxy group) , for example phthalimidoethoxy, or a C5_20 aryl group (also referred to as a C5-2oaryl-Cχ-7alkoxy group) , for example, benzyloxy.
Includes Other Forms
Included in the above are the well known ionic, salt, solvate, and protected forms of these substituents. For example, a reference to carboxylic acid (-COOH) also includes the anionic (carboxylate) form {-COO"), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms. Similarly, a reference to an amino group includes the protonated form (-N+HRXR2) , a salt or solvate of the amino group, for example, a hydrochloride salt, as well as conventional protected forms of an amino group. Similarly, a reference to a hydroxyl group also includes the anionic form (-0"), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms of a hydroxyl group.
Isomers, Salts, Solvates, Protected Forms, and Prodrugs Certain compounds may exist in one or more particular geometric, optical, enantiomeric, diasteriomeric, epimeric, stereoisomeric, tautomeric, conformational, or anomeric forms, including but not limited to, cis- and trans-forms; E- and Z- forms; c-, t-, and r- forms; endo- and exo-forms; R- , S-, and meso-forms; D- and L-forms; d- and 1-forms; (+) and (-) forms; keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms; syn- and anti-forms ; synclinal- and anticlinal-forms; - and β-forms; axial and equatorial forms; boat-, chair-, twist-, envelope-, and halfchair-forms; and combinations thereof, hereinafter collectively referred to as "isomers" (or "isomeric forms").
Note that, except as discussed below for tautomeric forms, specifically excluded from the term "isomers", as used herein, are structural (or constitutional) isomers (i.e. isomers which differ in the connections between atoms rather than merely by the position of atoms in space) . For example, a reference to a methoxy group, -0CH3, is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, a hydroxymethyl group, -CH2OH.
Similarly, a reference to ortho-chlorophenyl is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, meta- chlorophenyl . However, a reference to a class of structures may well include structurally isomeric forms falling within that class (e.g., Cχ_7 alkyl includes n-propyl and iso-propyl; butyl includes n-, iso-, sec-, and tert-butyl; methoxyphenyl includes ortho-, meta-, and para-methoxyphenyl) .
The above exclusion does not pertain to tautomeric forms, for example, keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms, as in, for example, the following tautomeric pairs: keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/amidine, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, N-nitroso/hyroxyazo, and nitro/aci-nitro .
Figure imgf000026_0001
keto enol enolate
Note that specifically included in the term "isomer" are compounds with one or more isotopic substitutions. For example, H may be in any isotopic form, including 1H, 2H (D) , and 3H (T) ; C may be in any isotopic form, including 12C, 13C, and 1C; 0 may be in any isotopic form, including 160 and 180; and the like.
Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound includes all such isomeric forms, including (wholly or partially) racemic and other mixtures thereof. Methods for the preparation (e.g. asymmetric synthesis) and separation (e.g., fractional crystallisation and chromatographic means) of such isomeric forms are either known in the art or are readily obtained by adapting the methods taught herein, or known methods, in a known manner. Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound also includes ionic, salt, solvate, and protected forms of thereof, for example, as discussed below.
It may be convenient or desirable to prepare, purify, and/or handle a corresponding salt of the active compound, for example, a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al . , 1977, "Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts", J. Pharm. Sci . , Vol. 66, pp. 1-19.
For example, if the compound is anionic, or has a functional group which may be anionic (e.g., -COOH may be -COO"), then a salt may be formed with a suitable cation. Examples of suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na+ and K+, alkaline earth cations such as Ca2+ and Mg2+, and other cations such as Al3+. Examples of suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e., NH4 +) and substituted ammonium ions (e.g., NH3R+, NH2R2 +, NHR3 +, NR4 +) . Examples of some suitable substituted ammonium ions are those derived from: ethylamine, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, triethylamine, butylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine, benzylamine, phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine. An example of a common quaternary ammonium ion is N(CH3)4 +.
If the compound is cationic, or has a functional group which may be cationic (e.g., -NH2 may be -NH3 +) , then a salt may be formed with a suitable anion. Examples of suitable inorganic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following inorganic acids: hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, sulphuric, sulphurous, nitric, nitrous, phosphoric, and phosphorous. Examples of suitable organic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following organic acids: acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, palmitic, lactic, malic, pamoic, tartaric, citric, gluconic, ascorbic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, aspartic, benzoic, cinnamic, pyruvic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetyoxybenzoic, fumaric, phenylsulfonic, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, pantothenic, isethionic, valeric, lactobionic, and gluconic. Examples of suitable polymeric anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following polymeric acids: tannic acid, carboxymethyl cellulose.
It may be convenient or desirable to prepare, purify, and/or handle a corresponding solvate of the active compound. The term "solvate" is used herein in the conventional sense to refer to a complex of solute (e.g. active compound, salt of active compound) and solvent. If the solvent is water, the solvate may be conveniently referred to as a hydrate, for example, a mono-hydrate, a di-hydrate, a tri-hydrate, etc.
It may be convenient or desirable to prepare, purify, and/or handle the active compound in a chemically protected form.
The term "chemically protected form" , as used herein, pertains to a compound in which one or more reactive functional groups are protected from undesirable chemical reactions, that is, are in the form of a protected or protecting group (also known as a masked or masking group or a blocked or blocking group) . By protecting a reactive functional group, reactions involving other unprotected reactive functional groups can be performed, without affecting the protected group; the protecting group may be removed, usually in a subsequent step, without substantially affecting the remainder of the molecule. See, for example, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (T. Green and P. Wuts, Wiley, 1999) .
For example, a hydroxy group may be protected as an ether (- OR) or an ester (-OC(=0)R), for example, as: a t-butyl ether; a benzyl, benzhydryl (diphenylmethyl) , or trityl (triphenylmethyl) ether; a trimethylsilyl or t-butyldimethylsilyl ether; or an acetyl ester (-OC(=0)CH3, -OAc) .
For example, an aldehyde or ketone group may be protected as an acetal or ketal, respectively, in which the carbonyl group (>C=0) is converted to a diether (>C(OR)2)/ by reaction with, for example, a primary alcohol. The aldehyde or ketone group is readily regenerated by hydrolysis using a large excess of water in the presence of acid.
For example, an amine group may be protected, for example, as an amide or a urethane, for example, as: a methyl amide (-NHC0-CH3); a benzyloxy amide (-NHCO-OCH2C6H5, -NH-Cbz) ; as a t-butoxy amide (-NHCO-OC (CH3) 3, -NH-Boc) ; a 2-biphenyl-2- propoxy amide (-NHCO-OC (CH3)
Figure imgf000029_0001
-NH-Bpoc) , as a 9- fluorenylmethoxy amide (-NH-Fmoc) , as a 6-nitroveratryloxy amide (-NH-Nvoc) , as a 2-trimethylsilylethyloxy amide (-NH- Teoc) , as a 2 , 2 , 2-trichloroethyloxy amide (-NH-Troc) , as an allyloxy amide (-NH-Alloc), as a 2 (-phenylsulphonyl) ethyloxy amide (-NH-Psec); or, in suitable cases, as an N-oxide (>NO$)
For example, a carboxylic acid group may be protected as an ester for example, as: an Cχ_7 alkyl ester (e.g. a methyl ester; a t-butyl ester); a C1-7 haloalkyl ester (e.g., a Cx_7 trihaloalkyl ester) ; a triC1-7 alkylsilyl-Cι-7 alkyl ester; or a C5_2o aryl-Cχ-7 alkyl ester (e.g. a benzyl ester; a nitrobenzyl ester); or as an amide, for example, as a methyl amide.
For example, a thiol group may be protected as a thioether
(-SR) , for example, as: a benzyl thioether; an acetamidomethyl ether ( -S-CH2NHC (=0) CH3) .
It may be convenient or desirable to prepare, purify, and/or handle the active compound in the form of a prodrug. The term "prodrug" , as used herein, pertains to a compound which, when metabolised (e.g. in vivo) , yields the desired active' compound. Typically, the prodrug is inactive, or less active than the active compound, but may provide advantageous handling, administration, or metabolic properties.
For example, some prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g. a physiologically acceptable metabolically labile ester) . During metabolism, the ester group (-C(=0)OR) is cleaved to yield the active drug. Such esters may be formed by esterification, for example, of any of the carboxylic acid groups (-C(=0)OH) in the parent compound, with, where appropriate, prior protection of any other reactive groups present in the parent compound, followed by deprotection if required. Examples of such metabolically labile esters include those wherein R is Cχ_7 alkyl (e.g. -Me, -Et) ; Cχ_7 aminoalkyl (e.g. aminoethyl ; 2- (N,N-diethylamino) ethyl ; 2- ( -morpholino) ethyl) ; and acyloxy-Cχ_7 alkyl (e.g. acyloxymethyl ; acyloxyethyl ; e.g. pivaloyloxymethyl ; acetoxymethyl; 1-acetoxyethyl; 1- (1-methoxy-l-methyl) ethyl- carbonxyloxyethyl ; 1- (benzoyloxy) ethyl; isopropoxy- carbonyloxymethyl ; 1-isopropoxy-carbonyloxyethyl ; cyclohexyl- carbonyloxymethyl; 1-cyclohexyl -carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxymethyl ; 1-cyclohexyloxy- carbonyloxyethyl ; (4-tetrahydropyranyloxy) carbonyloxymethyl; 1- (4 -tetrahydropyranyloxy) carbonyloxyethyl ; (4 -tetrahydropyranyl) carbonyloxymethyl; and 1- (4-tetrahydropyranyl) carbonyloxyethyl) .
Also, some prodrugs are activated enzymatically to yield the active compound, or a compound which, upon further chemical reaction, yields the active compound. For example, the prodrug may be a sugar derivative or other glycoside conjugate, or may be an amino acid ester derivative.
Selective Inhibition
'Selective inhibition' means the inhibition of one enzyme to a greater extent than the inhibition of one or more other enzymes. This selectivity is measurable by comparing the concentration of a compound required to inhibit 50% of the activity (IC50) of one enzyme against the concentration of the same compound required to inhibit 50% of the activity (IC50) of the other enzyme (see below) . The result is expressed as a ratio. If the ratio is greater than 1, then the compound tested exhibits some selectivity in its inhibitory action.
The compounds of the present invention preferably exhibit a selectivity of greater than 3, 10, 20 or 50 against DNA-PK over PI 3-kinase.
The compounds of the present invention preferably exhibit a selectivity of greater than 5, 10, 50 or 100 against DNA-PK over ATM.
It is preferred that the IC50s used to determine selectivity are determined using the methods described herein. Brief Description of the Drawings
Figure 1 shows the structure of preferred compounds of formula lb. Figure 2 shows the structure of preferred compounds of formula lc.
Figure 3 shows the structure of preferred compounds of formula la.
Figure 4 shows the structures of further preferred compounds of formula la.
Figure 5 shows the structures of further preferred compounds of formula la.
Further Preferences In formula I, when R1 and R2 form, along with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms, this may form part of a C4_2o heterocyclyl group defined above (except with a minimum of 4 ring atoms) , which must contain at least one nitrogen ring atom. It is preferred that Rx and R2 form, along with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, a heterocyclic ring having 5, 6 or 7 atoms, more preferably 6 ring atoms.
Single rings having one nitrogen atom include azetidine, azetidine, pyrrolidine (tetrahydropyrrole) , pyrroline (e.g., 3-pyrroline, 2 , 5-dihydropyrrole) , 2H-pyrrole or 3H-pyrrole (isopyrrole, isoazole) , piperidine, dihydropyridine, tetrahydropyridine , and azepine; two nitrogen atoms include imidazolidine, pyrazolidine (diazolidine) , imidazoline, pyrazoline (dihydropyrazole) , and piperazine; one nitrogen and one oxygen include tetrahydrooxazole, dihydrooxazole, tetrahydroisoxazole, dihydroisoxazole, morpholine, tetrahydrooxazine, dihydrooxazine, and oxazine; one nitrogen and one sulphur include thiazoline, thiazolidine, and thiomorpholine .
Preferred rings are those containing one heteroatom in addition to the nitrogen, and in particular, the preferred heteroatoms are oxygen and sulphur. Thus preferred groups include morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiazolinyl . Preferred groups without a further heteroatom include pyrrolidine
The most preferred groups are morpholino and thiomorpholino.
As mentioned above, these heterocyclic groups may themselves be substituted; a preferred class of substituent is a Cχ_7 alkyl group. When the heterocyclic group is morpholino, the substituent group or groups are preferably methyl or ethyl, and more preferably methyl . A sole methyl substituent is most preferably in the 2 position.
As well as the single ring groups listed above, rings with bridges or cross-links are also envisaged. Examples of these types of ring where the group contains a nitrogen and an oxygen atom are :
Figure imgf000033_0001
These are named 8-oxa-3 -aza-bicyclo [3.2.1] oct-3-yl, 6-oxa-3- aza-bicyclo [3.1.0] hex-3-yl, 2-oxa-5-aza-bicyclo [2.2. l]hept-5- yl, and 7-oxa-3-aza-bicyclo [4.1.0] hept-3-yl, respectively. The proviso as set in the first aspect of the invention preferably excludes compounds where X and Y are CR4 and O, R3 and R4 together form a fused benzene ring, and R1 and R together with the N to which they are attached form a morpholino group, and the fused benzene does not bear as a sole substituent a substituent at the 8- position. An alternative preferred embodiment is to exclude compounds where X and Y are CR4 and O, R3 and R4 together form a fused benzene ring, and R1 and R2 together with the N to which they are attached form a morpholino group, and the fused benzene does not bear a sole substituent that is a phenyl group.
Preferred aspects of compounds of formula la It is preferred that R1 and R2 in formula la together form a morpholino group.
In one preferred aspect of compounds of formula la, R4 is preferably H. R3 is preferably a C5.20 aryl group, more preferably a C5-20 carboaryl group, and in particular an optionally substituted phenyl group. Preferred substituents include halo (particularly fluoro and chloro) , Cχ-7 alkyl (particularly Cx alkyl or t-butyl) , ether, alkoxy (in particular methoxy) , nitro, cyano, acyl, formyl, ester, acyloxy, hydroxy, carboxy, C5_20 aryl (particularly phenyl) , C3- 20 heterocyclyl, acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido, and amino.
When R3 is C5_20 aryl, examples of preferred groups include optionally substituted napthalene, quiniline, pyridine, indole, indazole, pyrazine, pyrrole, imidazole, thiophene, thiazole, benzo [b] thiophene, furan and benzofuran. R3 may be substituted with one or more substituents, preferably one substituent. Preferably R3 is a mono substituted phenyl.
Where R3 is a C5-2o aryl group other than phenyl, preferred substituents include Cχ-7 alkyl, formyl and ether (in particular alkoxy) .
When R3 is a C3-2o aryl group, the substituents may be at any position on the aryl group. Accordingly, when R3 is an optionally substituted phenyl the substituents may be at the ortho- (2-) , meta- (3-) or para- (4-) position. It is generally preferred that the substituents are in the para- (or 4-) position. Preferably R3 is a 4-substituted phenyl. The nature of the substituent is discussed below.
Preferred R substituents
A first group of preferred substituents include halo (particularly fluoro and chloro) , Cχ-7 alkyl (particularly t- butyl) and alkoxy (particularly methoxy) .
Preferred compounds of this type include 2- (morpholin-4-yl) -6- phenyl-pyran-4-one (Compound 285), 2- (4-chlorophenyl) -6- (morpholin-4-yl) -pyran-4-one (Compound 284) , 2- (3- methoxyphenyl) -6- (morpholin-4-yl) -pyran-4-one (Compound 287), 2- (4- tert-butyl-phenyl) -6- (morpholin-4-yl) -pyran-4-one
(Compound 289), 2- (2-methoxyphenyl) -6- (morpholin-4-yl) -pyran- 4-one (Compound 286), 2- (4-Methoxyphenyl) -6- (morpholin-4-yl) - pyran-4-one (Compound 288), 6- (4-fluorophenyl) -2- (morpholin-4- yl) pyran-4-one (Compound 292), 6- (3-fluorophenyl) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) pyran-4 -one (Compound 291) and 6- (2- fluorophenyl) -2- (morpholin-4 -yl)pyran-4 -one (Compound 290), with 6- (4-fluorophenyl) -2- (morpholin-4-yl ) pyran-4-one (Compound 292) being the most preferred. (See Figure 3) . Preferably the substituent is Cχ_7 alkyl, and in particular Ci alkyl or t-butyl. Preferably R3 is substituted Cχ_7 alkyl (i.e. C_7 alkylene), and preferred substituents are discussed below.
A second group of preferred substituents include acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido and amino.
In accordance with the definitions above, it is preferred that the amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups of the preferred acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido and amino substituents are independently H, Cχ-7 alkyl (including substituted Cχ-7 alkyl, i.e. Cχ_7 alkylene) , C5-2o aryl (including C5-20 aralkyl) , C3-20 heterocycle or two of the groups form a heterocycle. Preferably the amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups are independently H, C alkyl, phenyl or heterocyclyl containing 3 to 7 ring atoms, or two or more groups form a heterocyclyl ring.
Where the amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups of the second group of preferred substituents are C5-2o aryl it is preferred that the C5_2o aryl is phenyl, benzyl, pyridine, pyrimidine, oxazine, furan, thiophene, imidazole or oxazole.
Where the amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups of the second group of preferred substituents are C3-20 heterocyclyl they preferably have 3 to 7 ring atoms and preferably contain from 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms .
Where two of the amino, acyl, ester, acyloxy and amide groups of the second group of preferred substituents form a heterocyclyl comprising a heteroatom from the preferred substituent, the heterocyclyl preferably comprises 3 to 7 ring members . Preferably the heterocyclyl contains from 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms. Examples of preferred heterocyclyls include those derived from piperazine and azepine, morpholine and thiomorpholine .
Further substitution
In general, where R3 of formula la is C5-20 aryl group or C5-20 carboaryl group, it is preferred that the C5-20 aryl or C5_2o carboaryl group is substituted. It is also preferred that when R3 is optionally substituted phenyl, the optionally substituted phenyl group is itself further substituted. It is particularly preferred that the preferred R3 substituents discussed above are further substituted (i.e. the Cχ_7 alkyl, ether, alkoxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, C5-20 aryl, C3-2o heterocyclyl, acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido, and amino are themselves further substituted) . The further substitution may comprise any of the substituents or groups described herein but is preferably one or more of halo (in particular fluoro or chloro) , nitro, cyano (in particular methyl- or ethylcyano) , hydroxy, ester, ether, alkoxy (in particular methoxy) , acyloxy, acyl, thioether, carboxy, amino (in particular -NH2 and -NMe2) , C5_2o aryl (in particular phenyl, thiophene and furan), thioether, carbamate, Cχ_7 alkyl and C3_20 heterocyclyl (in particular N- , O- and S- containing heterocyclyl including tetrahydrofuran, piperidine and pyrrolidine) . Thus, for example, R3 may be haloalkyl substituted phenyl, cyanoalkyl substituted phenyl or trifluoromethoxy substituted phenyl.
Accordingly, in a preferred class of compounds in which R3 of formula la is Cχ_7 alkyl substituted phenyl it is preferred that the alkyl substituent is further substituted (to form Cχ-7 alkylene) by halo, amino, amido, acylamido, ester or acyloxy groups .
In the preferred class of compounds in which R3 is a phenyl substituted with acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido or amino, it is preferred that these substituents are further substituted, preferably by halo (in particular fluoro or chloro) , nitro, cyano (in particular methyl- or ethylcyano) , hydroxy, ester, ether, acyloxy, acyl, thioether, carboxy, C5_2o aryl, Cχ_7 alkyl and C3_20 heterocyclyl (in particular N- , O- and S- containing heterocyclyl) .
In a preferred group of compounds in this preferred aspect of compounds of formula la R3 is aminomethyl substituted phenyl, where the amino group is preferably further substituted as stated above. Preferably the aminomethyl group is at the 3- or 4-position on the phenyl.
In another preferred group of compounds in this preferred aspect of compounds of formula la R3 is amido substituted phenyl, where the amido group is preferably further substituted as stated above. Preferably the amido group is at the 3- or 4-position on the phenyl.
In another preferred group of compounds in this preferred aspect of compounds of formula la R3 is acylamido substituted phenyl, where the acylamido group is preferably further substituted as stated above. Preferably the acylamido group is at the 3- or 4-position on the phenyl.
In another preferred group of' compounds in this preferred aspect of compounds of formula la R3 is amino substituted phenyl, where the amino group is preferably further substituted as stated above . Preferably the amino group is at the 3- or 4-position on the phenyl.
In another preferred aspect of compounds of formula la, where R3 and R4 together are -A-B- , which collectively represent a fused aromatic ring which is benzene, it is preferred that the 5 position is unsubstituted (i.e. R5 = H) and that one or two of the 6, 7 and 8 positions are substituted. Preferably only one of the 6, 7 and 8 positions is substituted. Preferably the 7-position is substituted. Preferably the substituents are selected from halo (in particular bromo) ; ether (in particular aralkyl ethers and especially where the aryl is further substituted with halo, C_7 alkyl, alkoxy or nitro) ; C5- 20 aryl (in particular napth-1-yl and napth-2-yl) optionally substituted by Cχ_7 alkyl (in particular methyl) including Cχ_7 alkyl (in particular propyl) substituted by C5-2o aryl (preferably phenyl) ; C5-2o heteroaryl (in particular benzo [b] thiophen-3-yl , benzo [b] thiophen-2-yl , thiophen-3-yl , thiophen-2-yl, furan-2-yl, indol-6-yl, quinoline-8-yl, phenoxathiin-4-yl) optionally substituted by acyl (in particular 5-acetyl-thiophen-2-yl) ; C3-2o heterocyclyl; amino; sulfonoxy (especially where the sulfonoxy substitutent is haloalkyl, in particular CF3) .
In another preferred class of compounds in this preferred aspect of compounds of formula la, it is preferred that the fused benzene ring (i.e. -A-B-) is substituted at the 8- position with a C3_2o heterocyclyl group. Preferably the heterocyclyl group is a tricyclic structure. Preferably the group comprises oxygen and/or sulfur heteroatoms and is based on the carbazole or anthracene system. Preferably a sulfur atom and/or oxygen atom is present in the central ring of the carbazole or anthracene systems. In the preferred group of compounds where the 6, 7, or 8 substituent is phenyl, it is preferred that the phenyl is itself further substituted. Preferably the phenyl is mono substituted but it may also be di substituted. Preferred substitutents include ester (especially where the ester substitutent is aralkyl, in particular benzyl, or Cχ-7 alkyl, in particular methyl or ethyl) ; ether (especially where the ether substituent is C_7 alkyl, in particular methyl or trifluoromethyl, or arylalkyl, in particular benzyl); cyano; acyl (especially where the acyl subsituent is Cχ_7 alkyl, in particular methyl) ; C5_20 aryl (in particular phenyl) ; acylamido (especially where the acyl substituent is Cχ_7 alkyl, in particular methyl) ; halo (in particular chloro) ; Cχ-7 alkyl (preferably methyl or ethyl) especially Cχ_7 alkyl substituted by hydroxy, fluoro, acylamido (in particular phthalimidyl) and Cχ_7 alkyl substituted with an ester with the ester substituent being Cχ.7 alkyl; hydroxy; amido (in particular where both amino substituents are H) ; amino (in particular where both amino substituents are H) ; and carboxy.
In another preferred group of compounds, the 5, 6 and 8 positions are unsubstituted (i.e. R5, R6 and R8 = H) , and the 7 position is substituted (i.e. R7 is not H) . More preferably, the substituent (R7) is selected from hydroxy, Cχ_7 alkoxy
(including C_7 alkyl-Cχ-7 alkoxy and C3-20 aryl-Cχ-7 alkoxy) , and acyloxy, with C3-20 aryl-Cχ_7 alkoxy being the most preferred. In this group, the Cχ-7 alkoxy is preferably either ethoxy, especially ethoxy substituted by optionally substituted aryl (in particular phenyl or pyridinyl) , optionally substituted aryloxy (in particular phenoxy, napthyloxy) , alkoxy, sulfonoxy (in particular where the sulfonoxy substituent is alkyl, such as methyl or ethyl, or aryl, such as phenyl), or Cχ_7 alkoxy is -0-CH2-, where the alkoxy substituent is preferably optionally substituted aryl (in particular phenyl or pyridinyl) and the C3- 0 aryl group is preferably optionally substituted phenyl, where the phenyl group being substituted is more preferred.
Preferred compounds of this type include 7-methoxy-2- morpholin-4-yl-benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 304), 7- hydroxy-2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 307) , 7- Benzyloxy-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 337) , 7- Benzoyloxy-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 423), 2- Morpholin-4-yl-7- (naphthalene-2-ylmethoxy) -chromen-4-one (Compound 418), 7- (4-Fluoro-benzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl- chromen-4-one (Compound 414), 7- (4-Bromo-benzyloxy) -2- morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 416) , 7- Cyclohexylmethoxy-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 419) , N- [3- (2-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-chromen-7-yloxy) - propyl] -isoindole-1, 3 -dione (Compound 422), 7- (2-Chloro- benzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 417) , 7- (4-chlorobenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 415) , 7- (4-cyano-benzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl- chromen-4-one (Compound 338), 7- (3-Chlorobenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 341) and 7- (3- Methylbenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 342) . Of these benzyloxy-2-morpholin-4 -yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 337) , 7- (4-Bromo-benzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl- chromen-4-one (Compound 416) and 7- (4-Chlorobenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 415) are particularly preferred. (See Figure 4) .
In a further preferred aspect of formula la, where R3 and R4 together are -A-B- , which collectively represent a fused aromatic ring which is benzene, it is preferred that there is a further ring fused to the fused benzene ring, which further fused ring is preferably benzene or cyclohexane. These further fused rings may be in any position on the fused ring.
Preferred compounds of this type include 2- (morpholin-4-yl) - benzo [h] chro en-4 -one (Compound 293), 2- (morpholin-4-yl) - benzo [g] chromen-4-one (Compound 301), 7, 8, 9, 10-tetrahydro- benzo [h] -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 297) , 2- (thiomorpholin-4-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 296), 2- pyrrolidin-1-yl -benzo [h] chromen-4 -one (Compound 312), 2- morphσlin-4-yl-benzo [f] chromen-4-one (Compound 310), 2-
(Thiazolidin-3-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 330) and 2- (2-Methyl-morpholin-4-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 317), with 2- (2-Methyl-morpholin-4-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 317)being the most preferred. (See Figure 5).
It is generally preferred in compounds of formula la where R3 and R4 together form -A-B- which represents a fused ring, that the amino group at the 2 position (i.e. NR1R2) is selected from dimethylmorpholino (in particular 3 , 5-dimethylmorpholino) , methylmorpholino (in particualar 3-methylmorpholino) , 3,4- dihydro-2H-benzo [1, 4] oxazin-4-yl, di (2-hydroxyethyl) amino, 2- (2-Hydroxy-ethoxy) -ethylamino or 2- (2-Bromo-phenoxy) - ethylamino.
Preferred aspects of compounds of formula lb
For compounds of formula lb, R4 is preferably H. R3 is preferably a C5-2o aryl group, more preferably a C5_20 carboaryl group, and in particular an optionally substituted phenyl group. It is generally preferred that the substituents are in the para- (or 4-) position. Preferred substituents include halo, C_7 alkyl and alkoxy, and more preferably halo (particularly chloro) and alkoxy (particularly methoxy) . Preferred compounds of this type are 6- (4-methoxyphenyl) -4- morpholin-4-yl-pyran-2-one (Compound 3) and 6- (4- chlorophenyl) -4-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-2-one (Compound 4) . (See Figure 1) .
Preferred aspects of compounds of formula lc
In a first preferred aspect of compounds of formula lc, R3 and R"4 together are -A-B- which represents a fused aromatic ring which is pyridine, and the compounds are substituted at the 2- position, preferably with amino substituents. It is preferred that the amino groups are ethylmorpholino (in particular 3- ethylmorpholino) , dimethylmorpholino (in particular 3- dimethylmorpholino) , 2 , 5-dihydro-lH-pyrrol-l-yl , or pyrrolidin-1-yl .
In a second preferred aspect of compounds of formula lc, where R3 and R"4 together are -A-B-, which collectively represent a fused aromatic ring which is pyridine, it is preferred that a further benzene ring is fused to the pyridine (at the 7 and 8 positions) to result in pyrimidino [2,1 -a] isoquinoline-4- ones . The further benzene ring is preferably unsubstituted.
In this preferred aspect it is preferred that R1 and R2 of formula lc form morpholine, ethylmorpholine (in particualr 3- ethylmorpholine) , dihydropyrrole (in particular 2,5-dihydro- IH-pyrrol-l-yl or tetrahydropyrrole) .
Preferred compounds of this type are 2-morpholin-l-yl- pyrimido- [2 , 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 5), 2-((S)-3- Hydroxy-pyrrolin-1-yl) -pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 12), 2- ( (2S, 6R) -2 , 6-Dimethyl-morpholin-4-yl) - pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 13) and 2- Thiomorpholin-4 -yl-pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 6), with 2 -morpholin-1-yl-pyrimido- [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 5) being the most preferred. (See Figure 2) .
In a second preferred aspect of compounds of formula lc, where R3 and R"4 together are -A-B-, which collectively represent a fused aromatic ring which is pyridine, it is preferred that the 5, 6 and 8 positions are unsubstituted (i.e. R5, R6 and R8 = H) , and that the 7 position is substituted (i.e. R7 is not H) . More preferably, the substituent (R7) is selected from hydroxy, Cχ_ alkoxy (including Cχ_7 alkyl-Cχ-7 alkoxy and C3-2o aryl-Cχ-7 alkoxy) and acyloxy, with C3_2o aryl-Cχ- alkoxy being the most preferred. In this group, the Cχ-7 alkoxy is preferably -0-CH2- and the C3-2o aryl group is preferably optionally substituted phenyl.
Acronyms
For convenience, many chemical moieties are represented using well known abbreviations, including but not limited to, methyl (Me) , ethyl (Et) , n-propyl (nPr) , iso-propyl (iPr) , n-butyl (nBu) , tert-butyl (tBu) , n-hexyl (nHex) , cyclohexyl (cHex) , phenyl (Ph) , biphenyl (biPh) , benzyl (Bn) , naphthyl (naph) , methoxy (MeO) , ethoxy (EtO) , benzoyl (Bz) , and acetyl (Ac) .
For convenience, many chemical compounds are represented using well known abbreviations, including but not limited to, methanol (MeOH) , ethanol (EtOH) , iso-propanol (i-PrOH) , methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) , ether or diethyl ether (Et20) , acetic acid (AcOH) , dichloromethane (methylene chloride, DCM) , trifiuoroacetic acid (TFA) , dimethylformamide (DMF) , tetrahydrofuran (THF) , and dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) . Synthesis Routes
Compounds as described in the first aspect of the invention can be synthesised by a number of methods, examples of some of which are given below.
Broadly, the synthetic strategy involves performing a cyclisation to form the central core followed by a coupling reaction such as a Suzuki reaction to add substituents to the core structure.
The key step in most of these synthesis routes is the formation of the central aromatic ring; this can be accomplished in numerous ways, as shown below, and include condensative cyclisation.
In many cases appropriate substitution can be present in the starting materials, although example of the further derivation of end products is also given.
Synthesis Route 1: Synthesis of 4- orpholin-4-yl-6- (aryl) pyran-2 -ones
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000046_0002
(a) t-BuOK, CS2 , THF; (b) n-Bu4 HS04 / NaOH, Etl , DCM; (c) morpholine, EtOH, reflux;
(d) Etl, K2C03, acetone; (e) ethyl bromoacetate, Zn, THF
(a) 3-aryl-3-hydroxy-dithioacrylic acids
A solution of CS2 (1.81ml, 30mmol) and acetophenone derivative (30mmol) in dry THF (20ml) was added dropewise over 30min to a well-stirred solution of potassium tert-butoxide (6.73g,
60mmol) in dry THF (50ml) under N2. A bright red coloration and the formation of a precipitate were observed. The mixture was left under vigorous stirring overnight and then was poured onto water (200ml) and extracted with ether (3x100ml) . The aqueous layer was acidified with 2N H2S04 to pH 1-2 (Watmann pH paper) and then extracted with ether (3x100ml) . The organics were dried over Na2S04 and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to give the desired compound.
(b) Ethyl 3-aryl-3-hydroxy-dithioacrylates
Tetrabutylammonium hydrogen sulphate (6.76g, 20mmol) and sodium hydroxide (21.6g, 40mmol) were dissolved in water (50ml) . A solution of 3 -aryl-3-hydroxy-dithioacrylic acid (20mmol) in dichloromethane (50ml) was added to the solution in one portion and the reaction mixture was stirred vigorously for 30min. The aqueous layer was removed and iodoethane (5 ml) was added to the dichloromethane solution that was then stirred for lh. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue taken into water (200ml) . The organic were extracted with ether (3x100ml) , dried over Na2S04 and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was then purified by column chromatography (ethyl acetate: petroleum ether 40-60°, 1:4) to give the desired compound.
(c) l-aryl-3-morpholin-4-yl-3-thioxo-propan-l-ones
Morpholine (1.31ml, 15mmol) was added to a solution of ethyl 3 -aryl-3-hydroxy-dithioacrylate (15mmol) in ethanol (20ml) . The reaction mixture was refluxed for 5 h and upon cooling at room temperature the desired compound crystallized. The compound was then isolated by filtration.
(d) l-aryl-3-ethylsulfanyl-3-morpholin-4-yl-propen-l-ols l-aryl-3 -morpholin-4 -yl-3-thioxo-propan-l-one (12mmol) was dissolved in dry acetone (20ml) and finely powdered K2C03 (1.83g, 13.2mmol) and iodoethane (1.07ml, 13.2mmol) were added to the solution. The reaction mixture was then reflux overnight and the solvent was then removed in vacuo . The residue was taken into water (50ml) and the organics were extracted with dichloromethane (3 x 30ml) , dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography to give the desired compound.
(e) 4-morpholin-4-yl-6- (aryl) -pyran-2 -ones
A suspension of activated zinc (heated at 120°C for lhr) (2.6g, 0.04 g atom), ethyl bromoacetate (3.18 g, 20 mmol) and a few crystals of iodine in dry THF (30ml) was heated at 50°C for 45 min with stirring. A solution of the respective l-aryl-3- ethylsulfanyl-3-morpholin-4-yl-propenone (lOmmol) in dry THF (50ml) was added dropwise with stirring and the mixture was refluxed for 3-4h. The mixture was then poured over-ice cold dilute 3% H2S04 (100ml) , the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (3x50ml) , the combined extract was dried over Na2S04 and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was purified by column chromatography (ethyl acetate:pet ether 40-60, 1:4) to give the pure pyran-2 -one.
Variations If the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, than the relevant amine can be used in step (c) in place of morpholine. The 6-aryl group in the final product can be a heteroaryl group, if the appropriate acetophenone derivative is used as a starting material.
Synthesis Route 2: Synthesis of 2-Amino pyrimidine isoquinolin-4-ones
References: Snyder and Robison, J. Amer. Chem. Soc , 74; 4910 - 4914 (1952); Di Braccio, M. , et al . , Eur. J. Med . Chem . ; 30(1) , 27-38 (1995) .
Figure imgf000049_0001
(a) Diethyl Malonate; (b) POCl3; (c) HNRαR2, EtOH
(a) Pyrimido [1, 2-a] isoquinoline-2, 4-dione Aminoisoquinoline (5.16g, 35.79 mmol) was dissolved in diethyl malonate (5.43 ml, 35.79 mmol). Ethanol (20ml) was added, and the solution was heated to 170°C for 4 h. The ethanol was removed by distillation and upon cooling, the dark residue in the reaction flask was triturated in ethyl acetate (10ml) . This resulted in formation of a pale solid which was collected by filtration and washed with ethyl acetate to furnish the title compound as a pale brown solid. (4.43 g, 24.89 mmol, 70% yield) . mp = 294-296°C. Analytically pure by LC-MS: m/z (ES+) : 213 (M+)
(b) 2 -Chloro-pyrimido [1, 2-a] isoquinolin-4-one
Pyrimido [1, 2-a] isoquinoline-2, 4-dione (4.43 g, 24.89 mmol) was dissolved in phosphorous oxychloride (20ml) and this solution was heated to reflux for 5 h. Upon cooling, the reaction mixture was poured carefully into ice water (~250ml) and adjusted to pH 7 by addition of sodium carbonate. This resulted in formation of a brown precipitate which was collected by filtration and washed with water to yield a brown solid. The crude product was chromatographed, eluting with DCM to provide the title compound as pale yellow crystals. (5.21 g, 22.70 mmol, 91% yield). mp 197-199 °C. Analytically pure by LC-MS : m/z (ES+) : 231.5 (M+)
(c) 2-Aminopyrimidine isoquinolin-4-ones
2-Chloro-pyrimido [2 , 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one was dissolved in boiling ethanol (20 ml) , and to this solution was added the appropriate amine (4 mol equiv) . The solution was heated to reflux, with vigorous stirring, for 16 h. The reaction mixture was then allowed to cool to room temperature, upon which a solid slowly crystallised. The crystalline solid was collected by filtration and washed with cold ethanol (30 ml) . This solid was dried under vacuum to provide the desired compound.
Variations
If different substituents are desired on the central core of two fused rings, these can be introduced by varying the substituents on the 2 -amino pyridine ring of the starting material, using protecting groups where appropriate.
Synthesis route 3: Synthesis of 2-Chloro-6-morpholin-4-yl- pyran-4-ones
Figure imgf000051_0001
a) (bis-4-t-b tylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbonate b) morpholine, NaHCθ3, 15 °C c) perchloric acid, 90 °C
(a) 4-Chloro-4- (2, 2, 2-trichloro-ethyl) -oxetan-2-one A solution of (Jbis-4- t-butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate
(11.8g) and diketene (83.5 ml) in CC14 (300 ml) was added drop wise over 120 min to a refluxing solution of CCl4, and was stirred for a further lh. The resulting pale yellow solution was cooled and azeotroped with dichloromethane. The resulting residue was stirred with hexane (3x150 ml) for 10 min and the liquor was decanted off through a celite pad. The filtered liquors were combined and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound as a pale yellow oil (125.0 g, 52.9%).
(b) 5, 5-Dichloro-l-morpholin-4-yl-pent-4-ene-l, 3-dione
Two separate solutions of 4-Chloro-4- (2 , 2 , 2-trichloro-ethyl) - oxetan-2-one (62.5 g, 0.26 mmol) and morpholine (24.0 g, 0.28 mol) in dichloromethane (120ml) were added simultaneously to a mixture of NaHC03 (44.0 g, 0.52 mol) in dry dichloromethane (300ml) . The reaction was maintained at 15 °C over 140 min with stirring. The reaction was filtered, washed with dichloromethane (3x100 ml) and the combined organic layers were concentrated in vacuo to a slurry which was then passed through a short silica pad, and further washed with dichloromethane (4x100 ml) . The combined organic layers were concentrated in vacuo, suspended in hexane (400 ml) and stirred for lh, filtered and dried to give a cream solid. The solid was suspended in tert-butyl methyl ether (100 ml) , stirred for 15 min, filtered, washed with butyl methyl ether and dried to give the desired compound as a white powder (47.8 g, 72%). m/z (LC-MS, ESP): 252 (M+ +1).
(c) 2-Chloro-6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one
To a suspension of 5, 5-Dichloro-l-morpholin-4-yl-pent-4-ene- 1, 3-dione (11.3 g, 44.9 mmol) in dioxane was added perchloric acid (11.4 ml, 0.14 mol) and the reaction was heated at 90 °C under N2 for 1 h. The reaction was cooled, neutralised with 2M NaOH (75 ml) and filtered. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane (4x30 ml) and the organic layers were combined and dried over MgS0 . The organic layer was further treated with charcoal and filtered through celite. The dark yellow filtrate was evaporated in vacuo, and the resulting solid was triturated with hexane (50 ml) and dried to give the desired compound (7.3 g, 75%) as a light yellow powder, m/z (LC-MS, ESP): 216 (M+ +1). 1HNMR (300MHz, DMSO-d6) : 3.3 (t, 4H) , 3.65 (t, 4H) , 5.4 (d, IH) , 6.25 (d, IH) .
Variations :
If the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, then the relevant amine, for example dimethylmorpholine can be used in step (b) in place of morpholine .
Synthesis route 4: Synthesis of 6-Aryl-2-morpholin-4-yl-pyran- 4-one and 6-heterocycle-2-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one
Figure imgf000053_0001
a) aryl /heterocycle boronic acid, Cs2C03 , Pd (PPh3) 4 , 90 °C
(a) 6-Aryl-2-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-ones
A solution of chloropyranone (22 mg, 0.1 mmol) in dioxane (0.3 ml, degassed by sonication and saturation with N2) was added to aryl boronic acid (0.13 mmol) and Cs2C03 (65 mg, 0.2 mmol) under N2 atmosphere. Pd(PPh3)4 (5 mg, 0.005 mmol) in dioxane (0.2 ml, degassed by sonication and saturation with N2) was then added to the solution under N2 atmosphere. The reaction was heated at 90 °C with vigorous stirring overnight. The sample was diluted with methanol/dichloromethane (1:2; 1 ml), passed through a plug of silica (isolute Si 500 mg) and purified by preparative HPLC.
Variations
Where the 6-substituent is desired to be a heterocycle rather than aryl, the appropriate heterocycle boronic acid can be substituted for aryl boronic acid above .
Synthesis route 4a: Synthesis of N-Alkyl 3- (6-Morpholin-4-yl- 4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) -benza ide derivatives
Figure imgf000053_0002
a) ( 3 -me hoxy cabonylphenyl) boronic acid, 2Cθ3, Pd (PPh3) 4, 90 °C b) NaOH c) N, N dimethylaminopyridine, ethylchloroformate (a) 3- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) -benzoic acid methyl ester
2-Chloro-6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one (7.98 g, 37 mmol), (3- methoxycarbonylphenyl) boronic acid (8.01 g, 44.5 mmol), and ground potassium carbonate (11.23 g, 81.40 mmol) were suspended in dioxane (50 ml) and degassed (sonication for 5 min then saturated with N2) . Pd(PPh3)4 (2.13 g, 1.85 mmol) was then added and the reaction mixture was then heated at 90 °C for 24hrs under a vigorous stirring and a N2 atmosphere. The solvent were removed in vacuo and the residue was then suspended in water 50 ml) and extracted with ethyl acetate (100 ml) . The organics were combined, washed with saturated brine and dried over sodium sulphate . The solvent was removed in vaccuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography (silica; dichloromethane :methanol ; 9:1) to give the title compound as a white solid (5.42 g, 46%) . m/z (LCMS, ESP) : 316 (M+ +1) .
(b) 3- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2 -yl) -benzoic acid sodium salt
3- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) -benzoic acid methyl ester (5.42 g, 17.20 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (25 ml) and sodium hydroxide (0.75 g, 18.90 mmol) was added. The stirred solution was then refluxed under nitrogen for three hours. The methanol was removed in vacuo and the residue was triturated in ether to give the title compound as a brown solid (4.30 g, 83.33%). m/z (LC-MS, ESP): 301 (M+ +1).
(c) N-Alkyl 3- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) -benzamide derivatives
To a stirred solution of 3- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4ff-pyran-2- yl) -benzoic acid sodium salt (52 mg, 0.16 mmol) in anhydrous dimethylacetamide (1 ml) , N,N-dimethylaminopyridine (2 mg, catalytic) and ethylchloroformate (19 μl, 0.192 mmol) were added, the solution was stirred for 45 minutes. The desired amine (0.32 mmol) was then added to the reaction mixture was left under stirring overnight. The compound was then purified by preparative HPLC to give the desired compound.
Variations
Where an aryl other than phenyl, or a heterocycle, is desired at the 3 -position, the appropriate
(methoxycarbonylaryl/heterocycle) boronic acid is substituted for (3-methoxycarbonylphenyl) boronic acid in step (a) .
Synthesis route 4b: Synthesis of N-Alkyl 4- (6-Morpholin-4-yl- 4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) -benzamide derivatives
Figure imgf000055_0001
a) ( -me hox cabonylphenyl) boronic acid, K2C03, Pd (PPh3) 4, 90 °C b) NaOH c) N, N dime hylaminopyridine, ethylchloroformate
(a) 4- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) -benzoic acid methyl ester
2 -Chloro-6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one (4.01 g, 18.60 mmol), (4-methoxycarbonylphenyl) boronic acid (4.01 g, 22.32 mmol), and ground potassium carbonate (5.64 g, 40.92 mmol) were suspended in dioxane (20 ml) and degassed (sonication for 5min then saturated with N2) . Pd(PPh3) (0.5 g, 0.4 mmol) was then added and the reaction mixture was then heated at 90 °C for 24 hrs under a vigorous stirring and a N2 atmosphere. The solvent were removed in vacuo and the residue was then suspended in water 50ml) and extracted with ethyl acetate (100 ml) . The organics were combined, washed with saturated brine and dried over sodium sulphate. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography (silica; dichloromethane :methanol; 9:1) to give the title compound as a white solid 3.71g, 63%). m/z (LC-MS, ESP) : 316 (M+ +1).
(b) 4- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4iT-pyran-2-yl) -benzoic acid sodium salt
4- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) -benzoic acid methyl ester (3.00 g, 9.52 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (20 ml) and sodium hydroxide (0.381 g, 9.52 mmol) was added. The stirred solution was then refluxed under nitrogen for three hours. The methanol was removed in vacuo and the residue was triturated in ether to give the title compound as a brown solid (3g, 97%) . m/z (LC-MS, ESP) : 301 (M+ +1) .
(c) N-Alkyl 4- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4Jϊ-pyran-2-yl) -benzamide derivatives
To a stirred solution of 4- (6-Morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4fJ-pyran-2- yl) -benzoic acid sodium salt (52 mg, 0.16 mmol) in anhydrous dimethylacetamide (1 ml) , N,N-dimethylaminopyridine (2 mg, catalytic) and ethylchloroformate (19 μl, 0.192 mmol) were added, the solution was stirred for 45 minutes. The desired amine (0.32 mmol) was then added to the reaction mixture was left under stirring overnight. The compound was then purified by preparative HPLC to give the desired compound.
Variations
Where an aryl other than phenyl, or a heterocycle, is desired at the 4-position, the appropriate (methoxycarbonylaryl/heterocycle) boronic acid is substituted for (4-methoxycarbonylphenyl) boronic acid in step (a)
Synthesis route 4c (i): Synthesis of (3 -aminomethyl-phenyl) -6- morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one derivatives
Figure imgf000057_0001
a) 3-formylphenylboronic acid, K2C03, Pd(PPh3) , 80 °C b) amine, sodium triacetoxyborohydride, glacial acetic acid
(a) [3- (6-Morpholine-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2yl) -phenyl] benzaldehyde
Chloropyranone (10.75 g, 50 mmol) and 3- formylphenylboronic acid (9.0 g, 60 mmol) were stirred in a solution of degassed dioxane (110 ml) for 20min. This was followed by the addition of Na2C03 (13.8 g, 100 mmol) and tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) palladium (2.88 g, 2.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was further degassed for 10 min and heated to 80 °C under N2 for 18 h. The reaction was then cooled to room temperature, concentrated in vacuo and purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate/methanol) to yield 3- (6-morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran- 2-yl) benzaldehyde as a orange solid (6.5 g, 45 %) . m/z (LC-MS, ESP) : 286 (M+ +1) .
(b) (3-aminomethyl-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-ones derivatives
3- (6-morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl)benzaldehyde (0.2 mmol) and the appropriate amine (0.24 mmol) were dissolved in dichloroethane (2 ml). Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.28 mmol) and glacial acetic acid (6.0 mmol) were then added and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixtures were then purified by preparatory HPLC.
Synthesis route 4c (ii): Synthesis of (4-aminomethyl-phenyl) - 6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one derivatives
Figure imgf000058_0001
a) 4-for ylphenylboronic acid, K2C03 Pd(PPh3)4/ 80 °C b) amine, sodium triacetoxyborohydride, glacial acetic acid
(a) [4- (6-Morpholine-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2yl) -phenyl] benzaldehyde
Chloropyranone (10.75 g, 50 mmol) and 4- formylphenylboronic acid (9.0 g, 60 mmol) were stirred in a solution of degassed dioxane (110 ml) for 20min. This was followed by the addition of Na2C03 (13.8 g, 100 mmol) and tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) palladium (2.88 g, 2.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was further degassed for 10 min and heated to 80°C under N2 for 18 h. The reaction was then cooled to room temperature, concentrated in vacuo and purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate/methanol) to yield 4- (6-morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran- 2 -yl) benzaldehyde as a yellow powder (6 g, 42 %) . m/z (LC-MS, ESP) : 286 (M+ +1) .
(b) (4 -aminomethyl-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-ones derivatives
4- (6-morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2-yl) benzaldehyde (0.2 mmol) and the appropriate amine (0.24 mmol) were dissolved in dichloroethane (2 ml) . Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.28 mmol) and glacial acetic acid (6.0 mmol) were then added and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixtures were then purified by preparatory HPLC.
Synthesis route 4d (i) : Synthesis of (3-amino-phenyl) -6- morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-ones
Figure imgf000059_0001
a) 3 - (BOC-aminophenyl) boronic acid, Na2C03 Pd (PPh3) 4 b) TFA
(a) Synthesis of [3- (6-Morpholine-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2yl) phenyl] carbamic acid tert-butyl ester
Chloropyranone (1.8 g, 8.35 mmol) and 3- (BOC- aminophenyl) boronic acid (2.4 g, 10 mmol) were stirred in a solution of degassed dioxane (45ml) for 20min. This was followed by the addition of Na2C03 (2.78 g, 20.16 mmol) and tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) palladium (483 mg, 0.08 mmol). The reaction mixture was further degassed for 10 min and heated to 80°C under N2 for 18 h. The reaction was then cooled to room temperature, concentrated in vacuo and purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate/methanol) to yield to the title compound (1.51 g, 48%). m/z (LC-MS, ESP): 373 (M+ +1) .
(b) Synthesis of (3-amino-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one
[3- (6-Morpholine-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2yl) -phenyl] carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (3.4 g, 9.2 mmol) was dissolved in 25% trifiuoroacetic acid in dichloromethane mixture (30ml) and stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo, precipitated with saturated NaHC03, filtered, washed with diethyl ether and dried to yield (3- amino-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one as a white solid (2.1 g, 85 %) . m/z (LC-MS, ESP): 273 (M+ +1).
Synthesis route 4d (ii) : Synthesis of (4-aminophenyl) -6- morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-ones
Figure imgf000060_0001
a) 4- (BOC-aminophenyl) boronic acid, Na2C03, Pd (PPh3) 4 b) TFA
(a) Synthesis of [4- (6-Morpholine-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2yl) - phenyl] carbamic acid tert-butyl ester
Chloropyranone (1 g, 4.64 mmol) and 4- (BOC-aminophenyl) boronic acid (1.14 g, 5.57 mmol) were stirred in a solution of degassed dioxane (10ml) for 20min. This was followed by the addition of Na2C03 (1.41 g, 10.21 mmol) and tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) palladium (268 mg, 0.05 mmol). The reaction mixture was further degassed for 10 min and heated to 80°C under N2 for 18 h. The reaction was then cooled to room temperature, concentrated in vacuo and purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate/methanol) to yield to the title compound (0.9g, 52%). m/z (LC-MS, ESP): 373 (M+ +1) .
(b) Synthesis of (4-amino-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one [4- (6-Morpholine-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-2yl) -phenyl] carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (402 mg, 1.08 mmol) was dissolved in 25% trifiuoroacetic acid in dichloromethane mixture (5ml) and stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo, precipitated with saturated NaHC03, filtered, washed with diethyl ether and dried to yield (4- amino-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4 -one as a yellow solid (230 mg, 79%) . m/z (LC-MS, ESP) : 273 (M+ +1) .
Synthesis route 4d(iii): (4-acylamido-phenyl) -6-Morpholin-4- yl-pyran- -ones derivatives
Figure imgf000061_0001
a) acid chloride/isocyanate/isothiocyanate, Hύnig' s base
(a) Appropriate acid chloride ( 0 . 24mmol ) was added to a solution of (4 -Amino-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4 -one (0 .2mmol) in dichloromethane (2 ml ) . Hύnig' s base ( 0 .4 mmol ) was then added and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 h . The reaction mixtures were then purified by preparatory HPLC .
Variations
Isocyanate or isothiocyanate can be used in place of acid chloride to generate ureido or thioureido structures .
Synthesis route 4d (iv) : (3 -acylamido-phenyl) - 6 -Morpholin-4 - yl-pyran- -ones derivatives
Figure imgf000062_0001
a) acid chloride/isocyanate/isothiocyanate, Hύnig's base
(a) Appropriate acid chloride (0.24 mmol) was added to a solution of (3-Amino-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4-yl-pyran-4-one
(0.2mmol) in dichloromethane (2 ml). Hϋnig' s base (0.4 mmol) was then added and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixtures were then purified by preparatory HPLC.
Variations
Isocyanate or isothiocyanate can be used in place of acid chloride to generate ureido or thioureido structures.
Synthesis route 4d(v) : Synthesis of (3-amino-phenyl) -6- morphol in- 4 -yl-pyran-4 -one derivatives
Figure imgf000062_0002
a) aldehyde, sodium triacetoxyborohydride, glacial acetic acid
(a) (3-Amino-phenyl) -6-morpholin-4 -yl-pyran-4 -one (0.2 mmol) and the appropriate aldehydes (0.24 mmol) were dissolved in dichloroethane (2 ml) . Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.28 mmol) and glacial acetic acid (6.0 mmol) was then added and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixtures were then purified by preparatory HPLC.
Synthesis Route 5: Synthesis of 2- (4 -Morpholinyl) -6-aryl-42T- pyran-4-ones
Figure imgf000063_0001
a) Ph3P=CHCθ2 e b) 250 °C c) acetyl morpholine, LDA d) MeS03H
(a) 3- (Aryl) -3-oxo-2-triphenylphosphoranylpropionates
A mixture of methyl triphenylphosphoranylideneacetate (20 mmol) and appropriate aroyl chloride (10 mmol) in anhydrous toluene (100 ml) under nitrogen was refluxed for 3 h, cooled to room temperature and the white precipitate formed was filtered. The filter cake was thoroughly washed with ethyl acetate (4x40 ml) and the combined filtrate evaporated in vacuo. The oil was purified by column chromatography to give the desired compound. (b) Methyl 3 - (aryl) propiolates
Methyl 3- (3-aryl) -3-oxo-2-triphenylphosphoranylpropanoate (9 mmol) was slowly warmed to 250°C in a kugelrohr distillation apparatus (1 Torr) . Distillate was collected for 20 minutes at 250°C and was purified by column chromatography to give the desired product.
(c) 4- [ (2-Oxo-4-aryl-3-butynyl) carbonyl] morpholine lithium salts n-Butyllithium (2.5 M in hexanes, 5.3 ml, 13.2 mmol) was added dropwise at 0°C to a stirred solution of diisopropylamine (1.87 ml, 13.2 mmol) in THF (20 ml) under a nitrogen atmosphere. After 30 minutes, acetyl morpholine (1.53 ml, 13.2 mmol) was added dropewise to the reaction mixture and left for one h under stirring at 0°C. The reaction was then cooled to -78°C and methyl 3 - (3-aryl) propiolate (6 mmol) in THF (5 ml) was added dropwise to the reaction mixture and left to react at - 78°C for 30 minutes and then to 0°C for 1 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (15 ml) and the white suspension extracted twice with dichloromethane (30ml) . The organics were combined and evaporated under reduce pressure to give a solid which was triturated with acetone (10ml) . The solid was filtered and washed successively with water (5 ml) , acetone (5 ml) and ether (5 ml) . The solid obtained was then dried in vacuo overnight at 40°C to give the desired compound.
(d) 2- (4-Morpholinyl) -6-aryl-4H-pyran-4-one
A solution of 4- [ (2 -oxo-4 -aryl-3 -butynyl) carbonyl] morpholine lithium salt (2mmol) in methanesulphonic acid (6 ml) was stirred under nitrogen for 3 h at room temperature . The mixture was poured into saturated sodium carbonate solution (100 ml) and extracted with dichloromethane (3 x 50 ml) . The combined organics were dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography
Variations
If the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, than the relevant acetyl amine can be used in step (c) in place of acetyl morpholine.
Synthesis Route 6: Synthesis of 2-amino-chromen-4-ones (1st method)
Figure imgf000065_0001
X=0,S,CH2
(a) : cone . H2S04 , MeOH
Figure imgf000065_0002
(c) : triflic anhydride
(a) Salicylate esters.
A solution of the appropriate acid in methanol (150 ml) was treated with concentrated sulphuric acid (3 ml) . The solution was heated to reflux for 40 h and then cooled to room temperature. The reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo and then re-suspended in ethyl acetate (200 ml) . The solution was washed with 50% saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (4 x 150 ml) . The aqueous extracts were combined and washed with ethyl acetate (150 ml) . The organic extracts were combined, washed with brine (50 ml) , dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo to give the product, which was then crystallised from methanol to provide the desired compound.
(b) β-ketoamides .
A solution of diisopropylamine (5.1 ml, 3.0 mmol) in THF (30 ml) was cooled to -70°C and slowly treated with 2.5 M solution of n-butyl lithium in hexanes (14.0 ml, 35 mmol) and then warmed to 0°C and stirred for 15 minutes. The solution was cooled to -10°C and slowly treated with a solution of N-acetyl morpholine, N-acetyl piperidine, or N-acetyl thiomorpholine in THF (25 ml), maintaining the temperature below -10°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at this temperature for 90 minutes and then treated with a solution of the relevant salicylate ester in THF (25 ml) , followed by additional THF (5 ml) . The reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred for 16 h. The solution was quenched with water (5 ml) and 2 M hydrochloric acid (50 ml) and extracted into DCM (3 x 80 ml) . The organic extracts were combined, washed with brine (50 ml) , dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo to give an oily residue . The crude product was stirred vigorously in hot ether, causing precipitation of a white solid. This was collected, after cooling in ice, by filtration and washed with cold ether, to provide the desired compound.
(c) 2-amino-chromen-4-ones. A solution of the appropriate β-ketoamides in DCM (35 ml) was treated with triflic anhydride (3.8 ml, 23 mmol) and stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 16 h. The mixture was evaporated in vacuo and then re-dissolved in methanol (80 ml) . The solution was stirred for 4 h, treated with water (80 ml) and stirred for a further hour. The mixture was evaporated in vacuo to remove methanol. The aqueous mixture was adjusted to pH 8 by treatment with saturated sodium bicarbonate and then extracted into DCM (3 x 150 ml) . The extracts were dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo to give a solid. The crude product was partially dissolved in DCM and loaded onto a silica column, eluting with DCM followed by (1%; 2%; 5%) methanol in DCM. All fractions containing the desired product were combined and evaporated in vacuo to give an orange solid. The crude product was dissolved in hot methanol, treated with charcoal, filtered through celite and recrystallised from methanol to provide the desired compound.
Variations If the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, than the relevant acetyl amine can be used in step (b) in place of acetyl morpholine.
Synthesis Route 7a: Synthesis of 2-amino-chromen-4-ones (2nd method)
Di Braccio, M., et al., Farmaco, 50(10), 703-711 (1995); Vlahos, C.J., et al . , J". Biol. Chem., 269(7), 5241-5248 (1994) .
Figure imgf000068_0001
(a) CS2, Potassium t-Butoxide; (b) Etl, 2C03, Acetone; (c) (i)mCPBA, DCM; (ii) HNRαR2, MeCN; (djHN ^ , Ethylene Glycol, 160°C;
Figure imgf000068_0002
DBU, DMF, 60°C; (f) (i)mCPBA, DCM; (ii) HNR , MeCN; .Route illustrated for benzo- [h]- chromen-4 -ones (a) 4-hydroxy-chromen-2-thiones.
A suspension of potassium tert-butoxide (7.20 g, 64 mmol) in toluene (50 ml) was cooled to ~10°C and treated with a solution of the appropriate acetoaryl and carbon disulphide (1.20 ml, 20.0 mmol) in toluene (50 ml) . The resultant mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then treated with water (500 ml) . The mixture was washed with ether (2 x 100 ml) and charged into a 3 -neck round bottom flask. The aqueous solution was treated with 10% sulphuric acid, venting the flask through a bleach trap. The resultant suspension was stirred for 24 h to allow for removal of hydrogen sulphide. The solid was collected by filtration, washing with water (3 x 50 ml) and cold petrol (3 x 50 ml) . Recrystallisation from ethyl acetate / petrol provided the desired compound.
(b) 2- (Ethylthio) -chromen-4 -ones
A solution of 4-hydroxy-chromen-2-thione in acetone (10 ml) is treated with potassium carbonate and ethyl iodide and heated to reflux. The reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo, re- dissolved in DCM (20 ml) and washed with water (20 ml) . The aqueous layer was washed with additional DCM (3 x 20 ml) and the organic extracts were combined, dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo . The residue was recrystallised from ethyl acetate / petrol to provide the desired compound.
(c) 2-amino-benzo-chromen-4-ones
A solution of the appropriate 2- (ethylthio) -benzo-chromen-4 - one in DCM (10 ml) at 0°C is treated with a solution of mCPBA in DCM (10 ml) and stirred at room temperature. The reaction mixture is cooled to -20°C to form a precipitate which is removed and washed. This is suspended in acetonitrile, and treated with the appropriate secondary amine and stirred at room temperature. The reaction mixture is evaporated in vacuo and re-dissolved in ethyl acetate (100 ml) . This solution is then washed with 50% saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (2 x 100 ml) , dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo. The solid residue is triturated in ether, filtered and the solid collected recrystallised from methanol to provide the desired compound.
(d) 2-amino benzenechromen-4-ones
A mixture of 2-ethylsulphanyl-benzochromen-4-one, the appropriate amine (10 mol equiv) and ethylene glycol (10 ml) was heated to 160°C, with stirring, for 3 h. Upon cooling to room temperature the reaction mixture was poured onto ice water (100 ml) and extracted into DCM. The organic extracts were collected, dried over sodium sulphate, and the solvent was removed by evaporation in vacuo to yield the product as a pale solid. The product was purified by recrystallisation from a suitable solvent.
(e) (Benzo-4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) -thiometh lpolystyrene- divinylbenzene resin.
Merrifield resin (1% cross-linked, 1.2 mmol/g) (0.70 g, 0.84 mmol) was swelled in anhydrous DMF (4 ml) . The mixture was shaken gently for 15 minutes and then treated with a solution of the appropriate 4-Hydroxy-benzo-chromen-2-thione (0.50 g, 2.2 mmol) in DMF (3 ml) . After shaking for a further 15 minutes, the mixture is treated with 1,8- diazabicyclo [5.4.0] undec-7-ene (0.4 ml, 2.7 mmol). The reaction mixture is then heated to 70°C and gently shaken for 24 h. The resin is collected by filtration and washed with DMF, followed by methanol and finally washed with DCM. (f) Benzo-chromen-4-ones library
The appropriate (Benzo-4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) - thiomethylpolystyrene-divinylbenzene resin (0.030 g, 0.036 mmol) is swelled in anhydrous DMF and gently shaken for 15 minutes. The reaction mixture was treated with a prepared solution of amine (0.036 mmol) in DCM (0.2 ml) . The mixture is shaken at room temperature for 24 h, followed by addition of Amberlite IR120+ resin (50 mg) and shaking for a further 1 h. The reaction mixture is then filtered, washing the resin with DCM and methanol. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to provide 0.0014 g (0.004 mmol) of the crude desired compound, which is submitted for analysis by LC-MS without further purification.
Variations
If different substituents are desired on the central core of two fused rings, these can be introduced by varying the substituents on the ring of the salicylic acid starting material, using protecting groups where appropriate (e.g. see route 7b) .
Substi tuted morpholines
Substituted morpholines such as 2-Ethyl-morpholine and 2,2- Dimethyl-morpholine were prepared using methodology described in Bettoni et al . Tetrahedron, 1980, 36, 409-415, as discussed in relation to Compound 317 below. Synthesis Route 7b:
Solid phase synthesis of 7 -alkoxy-2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen- 4-ones
Figure imgf000072_0001
Figure imgf000072_0002
Figure imgf000072_0003
(a) CS2, Potassium t-Butoxide
Figure imgf000072_0004
(g) Alkylating agent
(f ) (i) tnCPBA, DCM (ii) HNR1^, MeCN
Steps (a) , (e) and (f) are as for Synthesis Route 7a.
(g) (7- (Alkox oxy) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) - thiomethylpolystyrene-divinylbenzene resins
(7- (Hydroxy) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) -thiomethylpolystyrene- divinylbenzene resin (0.030 g, <0.036 mmol) was swelled in anhydrous DMF and gently shaken for 15 minutes . The mixture was treated with 1 , 8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] undec-7-ene (0.2 ml, 1.3 mmol) . After shaking for a further 15 minutes, the mixture was treated with an alkylating agent (e.g. benzyl bromide) . The reaction was heated to 65°C and shaken for 20 h. The resin was collected by filtration and washed in order with DMF, methanol and DCM. This procedure was repeated on the resin with fresh reagents a further 3 times.
Variations
If different substituents are desired on the central core of two fused rings, these can be introduced by varying the substituents on the ring of the acetophenone starting material, for example using 2, 5-dihydroxyacetophenone in place of 2 , 4-dihydroxyacetophenone to generate 6-hydroxy substituted chromen-4-ones .
Synthesis route 7b (i): Derivatisation of 7-hydroxy substituted chromen-4-ones
Figure imgf000073_0001
a) TEA, PPh3/ ROH, DIAD b) mCPBA, morpholine
(a) (7-aryloxy-4-oxo-4H-chromen-7-yl) -thiomethylpolystyrene- divinylbenzene resins
S- (7-Hydroxy-4-oxo-4H-chromen-7-yl) -thiomethylpolystyrene- divinylbenzene resin (0.020 g, < 0.024 mmol) was swelled in THF (1 ml) in an Advanced Chemtech reaction fritted vessel and gently shaken for 15 min. Gently agitating for 10 min between the addition of each reagent, the vessel was sequentially treated with TEA (0.05 ml), a solution of triphenylphosphine (0.063 g) in THF (0.5 ml) and a solution of the appropriate alcohol (0.25 mmol) in THF (0.5 ml). After a further 10 min the vessel was treated with a solution of DIAD (0.047 ml) in THF (0.5 ml) , chilled in a dry ice / acetone bath prior to addition. The reaction vessels were gently agitated for 20 h, drained, and the resin washed with DCM x 2, DMF x 1, methanol x 1 and DCM x 2
(b) 7-aryloxy-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-ones
The resin bound chromone (maximum 0.036 mmol) was suspended in DCM (2 ml) and after shaking for 10 min, the mixture was treated with mCPBA (0.2 g, 1.1 mmol). The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 3 hours and then filtered. The resin was washed in order with DCM x 2 , methanol x 2 , DCM x 2 and re-suspended in DCM (2 ml) . After shaking for 15 minutes the mixture was treated with a solution of morpholine (0.005 ml, 0.05 mmol) in DCM (2 ml) . The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 h and filtered, washing the resin with methanol (2 x 2 ml) . The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to provide the title compound. The product was submitted for analysis by LC-MS without further purification.
Variations
If the amino group in the final product is desired to be other than morpholino, than the amine can be used in step (b) in place of morpholine. The 7-substituent may be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, heterocyclyl, etc rather than aryl by using the appropriate alcohol in step (a) . Synthesis route 7c: synthesis of 2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen- 4 -ones derivatives
Figure imgf000075_0001
a) Organoboron, K2C03 Pd (PPh3) 4, 90 °C
(a) Aryl substituted 2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-ones
Organoboron compound (0.058 mmol), Trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid 2-morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H-chromenyl ester (Compound 305 or 306) (20 mg, 0.053 mmol and powdered potassium carbonate (14.6 mg, 0.106 mmol) were added to a reaction tube, which was then purged with nitrogen and sealed. A flask of dioxane was degassed with nitrogen purge and sonication for 5 min before addition to the reaction tube (0.5 ml) . To this was added a solution of tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) palladium(O) (3.1 mg) in degassed dioxane (0.3 mL) and the reaction mixture was heated to 90 °C with reflux under a nitrogen atmosphere for 18 h. The reaction was cooled and passed through a silica plug (isolute Si 500mg cartridge) and eluted with 30 % Methanol/DCM (8 mL) . The solution was analysed by LCMS and purified by preparative HPLC.
Synthesis Route 8: Further derivitisation of 7- (hydroxy) -2- ( orpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one to 7 -alkoxy-2- (morpholin-4-yl) - chrome -4-ones
Figure imgf000075_0002
A solution of 7- (hydroxy) -2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen-4-one (307) (0.125 g, 0.50 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (5 ml) was treated with the appropriate aryl bromide, followed by a 40% methanolic solution of benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide (0.54 ml, 1.2 mmol) . The solution was heated to 80°C and stirred for 16 h. After cooling, the solution was treated with ethyl acetate (25 ml) and water (10 ml) . The mixture was stirred vigorously for 30 minutes and allowed to settle. The ethyl acetate layer was removed by pipette and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was recrystallised from methanol.
Synthesis Route 9: Further derivitisation of 7- (hydroxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one to 7-aroyloxy-2- (morpholin-4- yl) -chromen-4-ones
Figure imgf000076_0001
A solution of 7-hydroxy-2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one
(299) (0.25 g, 1.0 mmol) in DMF (10 ml) was treated with the appropriate aroyl chloride, followed by pyridine (0.10 ml, 1.2 mmol) at 0°C. The solution was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 16 h. The resultant suspension was diluted with ethyl acetate (100 ml) and washed with 0.5 M hydrochloric acid (50 ml) , water (50 ml) and brine (50 ml) . The organic extract was dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was recrystallised from ethyl acetate.
Use of Compounds of the Invention
The present invention provides active compounds, specifically, active 4-amino-pyran-2-ons, 2-amino-pyran-4-ones, 2-amino-4- ones, and 2-amino-pyridine-isoquinolin-4-ones . The term "active" , as used herein, pertains to compounds which are capable of inhibiting DNA-PK activity, and specifically includes both compounds with intrinsic activity (drugs) as well as prodrugs of such compounds, which prodrugs may themselves exhibit little or no intrinsic activity.
One assay which may be used in order to assess the DNA-PK inhibition offered by a particular compound is described in the examples below.
The present invention further provides a method of inhibiting DNA-PK inhibition in a cell, comprising contacting said cell with an effective amount of an active compound, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable composition. Such a method may be practised in vi tro or in vivo.
For example, a sample of cells (e.g. from a tumour) may be grown in vi tro and an active compound brought into contact with said cells in conjunction with agents that have a known curative effect, and the enhancement of the curative effect of the compound on those cells observed.
The present invention further provides active compounds which inhibit DNA-PK activity as well as methods of methods of inhibiting DNA-PK activity comprising contacting a cell with an effective amount of an active compound, whether in vi tro ox in vivo .
The invention further provides active compounds for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body. Such a method may comprise administering to such a subject a therapeutically-effective amount of an active compound, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
The term "treatment," as used herein in the context of treating a condition, pertains generally to treatment and therapy, whether of a human or an animal (e.g. in veterinary applications) , in which some desired therapeutic effect is achieved, for example, the inhibition of the progress of the condition, and includes a reduction in the rate of progress, a halt in the rate of progress, amelioration of the condition, and cure of the condition. Treatment as a prophylactic measure (i.e. prophylaxis) is also included.
The term "therapeutically-effective amount" as used herein, pertains to that amount of an active compound, or a material, composition or dosage from comprising an active compound, which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
Administration
The active compound or pharmaceutical composition comprising the active compound may be administered to a subject by any convenient route of administration, whether systemically/ peripherally or at the site of desired action, including but not limited to, oral (e.g. by ingestion) ; topical (including e.g. transdermal, intranasal, ocular, buccal, and sublingual); pulmonary (e.g. by inhalation or insufflation therapy using, e.g. an aerosol, e.g. through mouth or nose); rectal; vaginal; parenteral, for example, by injection, including subcutaneous, intradermal, intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intracardiac, intrathecal, intraspinal, intracapsular, subcapsular, intraorbital , intraperitoneal , intratracheal , subcuticular, intraarticular, subarachnoid, and intrasternal ; by implant of a depot, for example, subcutaneously or intramuscularly.
The subject may be a eukaryote, an animal, a vertebrate animal, a mammal, a rodent (e.g. a guinea pig, a hamster, a rat, a mouse), murine (e.g. a mouse), canine (e.g. a dog), feline (e.g. a cat), equine (e.g. a horse), a primate, simian (e.g. a monkey or ape), a monkey (e.g. marmoset, baboon), an ape (e.g. gorilla, chimpanzee, orang-utan, gibbon), or a human.
Formulations
While it is possible for the active compound to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical composition (e.g. formulation) comprising at least one active compound, as defined above, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, excipients, diluents, fillers, buffers, stabilisers, preservatives, lubricants, or other materials well known to those skilled in the art and optionally other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.
Thus, the present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions, as defined above, and methods of making a pharmaceutical composition comprising admixing at least one active compound, as defined above, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients, buffers, adjuvants, stabilisers, or other materials, as described herein.
The term "pharmaceutically acceptable" as used herein pertains to compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgement, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of a subject (e.g. human) without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Each carrier, excipient, etc. must also be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation.
Suitable carriers, excipients, etc. can be found in standard pharmaceutical texts, for example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th edition, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1990.
The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active compound with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active compound with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then if necessary shaping the product .
Formulations may be in the form of liquids, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, elixirs, syrups, tablets, losenges, granules, powders, capsules, cachets, pills, ampoules, suppositories, pessaries, ointments, gels, pastes, creams, sprays, mists, foams, lotions, oils, boluses, electuaries, or aerosols .
Formulations suitable for oral administration (e.g. by ingestion) may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets, each containing a predetermined amount of the active compound; as a powder or granules; as a solution or suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion; as a bolus; as an electuary; or as a paste.
A tablet may be made by conventional means, e.g., compression or moulding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients . Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active compound in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with one or more binders (e.g. povidone, gelatin, acacia, sorbitol, tragacanth, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose); fillers or diluents (e.g. lactose, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g. magnesium stearate, talc, silica); disintegrants (e.g. sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose) ; surface-active or dispersing or wetting agents (e.g. sodium lauryl sulfate); and preservatives (e.g. methyl p-hydroxybenzoate, propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, sorbic acid) . Moulded tablets may be made by moulding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active compound therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile. Tablets may optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach.
Formulations suitable for topical administration (e.g. transdermal, intranasal, ocular, buccal, and sublingual) may be formulated as an ointment, cream, suspension, lotion, powder, solution, past, gel, spray, aerosol, or oil. Alternatively, a formulation may comprise a patch or a dressing such as a bandage or adhesive plaster impregnated with active compounds and optionally one or more excipients or diluents .
Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include losenges comprising the active compound in a flavoured basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active compound in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active compound in a suitable liquid carrier.
Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active compound is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the active compound.
Formulations suitable for nasal administration, wherein the carrier is a solid, include a coarse powder having a particle size, for example, in the range of about 20 to about 500 microns which is administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e. by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose . Suitable formulations wherein the carrier is a liquid for administration as, for example, nasal spray, nasal drops, or by aerosol administration by nebuliser, include aqueous or oily solutions of the active compound.
Formulations suitable for administration by inhalation include those presented as an aerosol spray from a pressurised pack, with the use of a suitable propellant, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichoro- tetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide, or other suitable gases. Formulations suitable for topical administration via the skin include ointments, creams, and emulsions. When formulated in an ointment, the active compound may optionally be employed with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active compounds may be formulated in a cream with an oil-in-water cream base. If desired, the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least about 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane-1 , 3-diol , mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof. The topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active compound through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethylsulfoxide and related analogues.
When formulated as a topical emulsion, the oily phase may optionally comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent) , or it may comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabiliser. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat. Together, the emulsifier (s) with or without stabiliser (s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and/or fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations.
Suitable emulgents and emulsion stabilisers include Tween 60 , Span 80, cetostearyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate and sodium lauryl sulphate. The choice of suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties, since the solubility of the active compound in most oils likely to be used in pharmaceutical emulsion formulations may be very low. Thus the cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non-staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers. Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required.
Alternatively, high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils can be used.
Formulations suitable for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate.
Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the active compound, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate .
Formulations suitable for parenteral administration (e.g. by injection, including cutaneous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) , include aqueous and non-aqueous isotonic, pyrogen-free, sterile injection solutions which may contain anti-oxidants, buffers, preservatives, stabilisers, bacteriostats, and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents, and liposomes or other microparticulate systems which are designed to target the compound to blood components or one or more organs. Examples of suitable isotonic vehicles for use in such formulations include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Solution, or Lactated Ringer's Injection. Typically, the concentration of the active compound in the solution is from about 1 ng/ml to about 10 μg/ml, for example from about 10 ng/ml to about 1 μg/ml. The formulations may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilised) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets. Formulations may be in the form of liposomes or other microparticulate systems which are designed to target the active compound to blood components or one or more organs .
Dosage It will be appreciated that appropriate dosages of the active compounds, and compositions comprising the active compounds, can vary from patient to patient. Determining the optimal dosage will generally involve the balancing of the level of therapeutic benefit against any risk or deleterious side effects of the treatments of the present invention. The selected dosage level will depend on a variety of factors including, but not limited to, the activity of the particular compound, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the compound, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds, and/or materials used in combination, and the age, sex, weight, condition, general health, and prior medical history of the patient. The amount of compound and route of administration will ultimately be at the discretion of the physician, although generally the dosage will be to achieve local concentrations at the site of action which achieve the desired effect without causing substantial harmful or deleterious side-effects .
Administration in vivo can be effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently (e.g. in divided doses at appropriate intervals) throughout the course of treatment.
Methods of determining the most effective means and dosage of administration are well known to those of skill in the art and will vary with the formulation used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target cell being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations can be carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician.
In general, a suitable dose of the active compound is in the range of about 100 μg to about 250 mg per kilogram body weight of the subject per day. Where the active compound is a salt, an ester, prodrug, or the like, the amount administered is calculated on the basis of the parent compound and so the actual weight to be used is increased proportionately. EXAMPLES The following are examples are provided solely to illustrate the present invention and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention, as described herein.
Where molecular weight (Mw) is quoted as confirmation that the desired compound has been synthesised, this is the molecular weight of the protonated compound detected using LC-MS, and is therefore one unit higher than the actual Mw of the compound, i.e. Mw +1.
Synthesis Details Route 1 Compound 1 (a) 3 -phenyl-3 -hydroxy-dithioacrylic acid
Bright orange solid (5.9g, 75%) from (4.67ml, 40mmol) of acetophenone; FT-IR (ATR/cm-1) : 3055, 1542, 1450, 1234, 1059, 909, 751, 674; XH NMR (CDCl3) δ = 7.30 (IH, s) ; 7.35-8.05 (5H, m) , 15.18 (IH, s)
(b) Ethyl 3-phenyl-3-hydroxy-dithioacrylate
Brown oil (3.84g, 68%) from (4.91g, 25mmol) of 3-phenyl-3- hydroxy-dithioacrylic acid; FT-IR (ATR/cm-1) : 3062, 2970, 2923, 2550, 1395, 1225, 1042, 948, 755; XH NMR (CDCl3) δ = 1.31 (3H, t) , 3.20 (2H, q) , 6.84 (IH, s) , 7.34-7.83 (5H, m) , 15.06 (IH, s)
(c) 1-Phenyl-3 - orpholin-4-y1-3 -thioxo-propan-1-one
White crystalline solid (3.26g, 80%) from (3.64g, 16.25mmol) of ethyl 3-phenyl-3-hydroxy-dithioacrylate; FT-IR (ATR/cm" x) :3023, 2908, 2871, 1681, 1496, 1433, 1311, 1169, 1103, 953, 748; XH NMR (CDCl3) δ = 3.59-3.80 (6H, m) ; 4.33 (2H, m) ; 4.72 (2H, s) ; 7.38-7.96 (5H, m) (d) 1-phenyl-3 -ethylsulfanyl-3 -morpholin-4-yl-propenone
Brown oil (3.21g, 97%)
(e) 4 -morpholin-4 -yl- 6- (phenyl) -pyran-2-one (Compound 1)
White solid (0.38g, 15%) ; mp 161-162°C; FT-IR (ATR/cm"1) : 3049, 2956, 2901, 2862, 1977, 1628, 1537, 1436, 1109, 761, 687; 2H NMR (DMSO) δ = 3.63 (4H, t, 4.5 Hz, CH2N) , 3.81 (4H, t, 4.5 Hz, CH20) , 5.37 (IH, d, 2 Hz, H-3) , 7.17 (IH, d, 2 Hz, H-5) , 7.61- 7.65 (3H, m, ArH) , 8.03-8.08 (2H, m, ArH) ; UN: λmax (MeOH/nm) :291, 250; MS: m/z (LC-MS/ESP+) : 258 (M++l) , 211, 179, 133; Calcd CιsH15Ν03.0.1 EtOAc : C 69.51; H, 5.98; N, 5.26. Found: C, 69.54; H, 5.93; N, 4.96.
4 -morpholin-4 -yl- 6- (4- (t-butyl) phenyl) -pyran-2-one (Compound 2)
White needles (0.61g, 19%) ; mp 230-232°C; FT-IR (ATR/cm"1) : 3109, 3051, 2947, 2862, 1674, 1633, 1511, 1446, 1114, 941, 826, 782; XH NMR (DMSO) δ = 1.42 (9H, S, (CH3)3C) , 3.62 (4H, m, CH2N) , 3.79 (4H, m, CH20) , 5.34 (IH, bs, H-3) , 7.10 (IH, bs, H- 5) , 7.63 (2H, d, 8.5 Hz, ArH) , 7.96 (2H, d, 8.5 Hz, ArH) ; UN: λmax (MeOH/nm) : 265.5, 235.5; MS: m/z (LC-MS/ESP+) : 314 (M++l) ; Calcd C19H23Ν03 . 0.1H2O: C 72.40; H, 7.42; N, 4.44; Found: C, 72.50; H, 7.48; N, 4.18.
4 -morpholin-4 -yl- 6- (4-methoxyphenyl) -pyran-2-one (Compound 3)
White needles (0.43g, 15%) ; mp 212-213°C; FT-IR (ATR/cm"1) : 2969, 2926, 1681, 1619, 1505, 1442, 1240, 1180, 1113, 789; 2H NMR (DMSO) δ = 3.60 (4H, t, 4.5 Hz, CH2N) ; 3.79 (4H, t, 4.5 Hz, CH20) ; 3.94 (3H, s, MeO) ; 5.30 (IH, d, 2 Hz, H-3) ; 7.02 (IH, d, 2 Hz, H-5) ; 7.16 (2H, d, 9 Hz, ArH) ; 7.98 (2H, d, 9 Hz, ArH) ; UN: λmax (MeOH/nm) : 226, 256, 301.5; MS: m/z (LC-MS/ESP+) : 288 (M++l) , 157; Calcd C16H17Ν04 : C 66.89; H, 5.96; N, 4.88; Found: C, 66.65; H, 6.03; N, 4.51.
4-morpholin-4-yl-6- (4-chlorophenyl) -pyran-2-one (Compound 4)
White needles (0.31g, 21%) from (1.55g, 5mmol) of 1- (4-chlorophenyl) -3-ethylsulf anyl-3-morpholin-4-yl-propenone; mp 236- 237°C; FT-IR (ATR/cm"1) : 3040, 2969, 1681, 1624, 1535, 1235, 941, 785; XH NMR (DMSO) δ = 3.65 (4H, m, CH2N) ; 3.83 (4H, m, CH20) ; 5.40 (IH, m, H-3) ; 7.22 (IH, m, H-5) ; 7.75 (2H, m, ArH) ; 8.09 (2H, m, ArH) ; UN: A^ax (MeOH/nm) : 296.5, 254; MS: m/z (LC- MS/ESP+) : 292-294 (M++l) ; Calcd Cι5Hι4Cl 03 : C 61.76; H, 4.84; N, 4.80; Found: C, 61.55; H, 4.91; N, 4.55.
Route 2 - step (c)
2 -Morpholin-1-yl-pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 5)
Prepared from 2-chloro-pyrimido [2 , 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (0.230 g, 1 mmol) and morpholine (0.35 ml, 4 mmol) to give white crystals (0.236 g, 0.83 mmol, 83% yield). FT-IR (KBr disc): cm"13070, 2983, 2945, 2911, 2864, 1701, 1641, 1574, 1546,
1522, 1488, 1427, 1402, 1286, 1225, 1116, 773. m/z (El) : 281 (M+) , 250, 224, 195, 168, 128, 101, 77. ^Η NMR 200MHz, DMSO): 3.82 (8H, s, morpholine-H) , 5.73 (IH, s, H-3); 7.37 (IH, d, 8Hz, ArH); 7.75 (IH, m, ArH); 7.77 (IH, d, 5 Hz, ArH); 7.91 (IH, d, 5Hz, ArH); 8.62 (IH, d, 7.5 Hz, ArH); 8.88 (IH, d, 7.5 Hz, ArH)
2- (Thiomorpholin-4-yl) pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 6) Pale yellow crystals (0.255 g, 0.86 mmol, 86% yield). Mp =
240-242(C. UN (max = 354.5, 335.5, 320, 280.5, 261.5, 232, 200 nm (Methanol). IH ΝMR (200MHz, CDC13) (2.66(4H, m) ; 4.06(4H, m) ; 5.62 (IH, s) ; 7.01 (IH, d) ; 7.62 (3H, m) ; 8.60 (IH, d) ; 8.75 (IH, m) . ES-MS m/z = 298 (M+l) . Anal. Calcd for CιgHι5N3OS: C, 64.62; H, 5.08; N, 14.13. Found: C, 64.22; H, 4.86; N, 13.94.
2- (2, 5-Dimethyl-piperidin-l-yl)pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4- one ( Compound 7 )
White crystals (0.126 g, 0.41 mmol, 41% yield) . mp 214-216 °C. λmax = 356, 336, 322, 261.5, 231.5, 200nm (Methanol) . m/z (ES+) : 308 (M+ +1) , 179, 133. ^ NMR (200MHz, CDCl3) δθ.89(3H, s) ; 0.93(3H, s) ; 1.65 (4H, m) ; 4.42 (2H, s) ; 5.62 (IH, s) ;
6.96(1H, d) ; 7.61(3H, m) ; 8.59 (IH, d) ; 8.76 (IH, m) . Anal.
Calcd. for Cι9H21N30. 0.2CH3OH: C, 73.49; H, 7.00; N, 13.39.
Found: C, 73.92; H, 6.77; N, 13.56.
2- (4-Methyl-piperazin-l-ly)pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one
(Compound 8)
White solid (0.095 g, 0.32 mmol, 32% yield. mp = Sublimes above 285 °C. m/z (ES+) 295 (MH+) , 257, 179. XH NMR (200MHz, de-DMSO) δ2.91(3H, s) ; 3.44 (8H, m) ; 5.95 (IH, s) ; 7.49 (IH, d) ;
7.95 (IH, m) ; 8.02 (2H, m) ; 8.67 (IH, d) ; 8.99 (IH, m) .
2- (3 -Hydroxymethyl-piperidin-1-yl) pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin- 4-one (Compound 9) White solid (0.157 g, 0.50 mmol, 50% yield). mp 165-166 °C. ESMS m/z (ES+) 310 (M+H) , 257, 179. 2H NMR (200MHz, CDC13) 1.75(5H, m) ; 2.39 (IH, m) ; 3.31 (IH, m) ; 3.59 (3H, m) ; 4.09(2H, m) ; 5.64(1H, s) ; 7.01 (IH, d) ; 7.63 (3H, m) ; 8.63 (IH, d) ; 8.77(1H, m) .
2- [ (Tetrahydro-furan-2-ylmethyl) -amino] pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 10) White solid (0.173 g, 0.58 mmol, 58% yield). mp 174-175 °C. ESMS m/z = 296 (M+H) , 257, 179. U NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) δl .81 (4H, m) ; 3.56 (2H, d) ; 3.73 (IH, q) ; 3.86 (IH, q) ; 4.07 (IH, m) ; 5.29 (IH, s, NH) ; 5.43 (IH, s) ; 6.96 (IH, d) ; 7.59 (3H, m); 8.57 (IH, d) ; 8.76 (IH, d)
2- [Bis- (2 -hydroxy-ethyl) -amino] pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4- one (Compound 11)
White solid (0.076 g, 0.26 mmol, 26% yield). mp 211-212 °C. ESMS m/z = 300 (M+l) , 257, 179. XH NMR (200 MHz, D6DMS0) δ3.90 (4H, m, ) ; 5.62 (IH, s) ; 7.38 (IH, d) ; 7.81 (IH, m) ; 7.94 (IH, d) ; 8.58 (IH, d) ; 8.85 (IH, d) . Anal. Calcd for C16H17N303 : C, 69.88; H, 6.19; N, 13.55. Found: C, 69.70; H, 6.27; N, 13.44
2- (3 -Hydroxy-pyrrolidin-1-yl) pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 12)
Beige solid (0.211 g, 0.75 mmol, 75% yield), mp 240-241 °C. UN λmax = 248.5, 258.0, 273.5, 344.5, 362.0 nm (Methanol). ESMS m/z = 282 (M+l), 257, 179, 133. XH ΝMR (200 MHz, dsDMSO) δ2.18 (2H, m) ; 3.45 (2H, m) ; 3.86 (2H, m) ; 4.52 (IH, m) ; 5.17 (IH, s) ; 7.36 (IH, d) ; 7.80 (IH, m) ; 7.94 (2H, d) ; 8.63 (IH, d) ; 8.86 (IH, d)
2- (Cis-2/ 6-dimethylmorpholin-4yl)pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4- one (Compound 13)
White crystals (0.088 g, 0.28 mmol, 56% yield). mp 208-209 °C. ESMS m/z = 310 (M+l), 257, 179, 101. αH ΝMR (200 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.29 (6H, d) ; 2.68 (2H, dd) ; 3.70 (2H, m) ; 4.30 (2H, m) ; 5.63 (IH, s) ; 7.06 (IH, d) ; 7.67 (3H, m) ; 8.65 (IH, d) ; 8.81 (IH, d)
2- [Benzyl- (2-hydroxy-ethyl) -amino] pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin- 4 - one ( Compound 14 )
White crystals (0.077 g, 0.22 mmol, 44% yield) . ESMS m/z = 346 (M+l) , 257, 179, 101. XH NMR (200 MHz, dsDMSO) δ 3.77 (4H, m) ; 4.97 (2H, m) ; 5.63 (IH, s) ; 7.41 (6H, m) ; 7.95 (3H, m) ; 8.63 (IH, d) ; 8.84 (IH, d) .
2 [ (2 -hydroxy- ethyl) -methyl -amino] -pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin- 4 - one ( Compound 15)
White crystals (0.079 g, 0.29 mmol, 58% yield) . ESMS m/z = 270 (M+l) , 257, 179, 133, 101. XH NMR (200 MHz, CDCl3) δ 3.15 (3H, s) ; 3.92 (4H, m) ; 5.55 (IH, s) ; 7.00 (IH, d) ; 7.64 (3H, m) ; 8.62 (IH, d) ; 8.73 (IH, d) .
2- [ (2 -Hydroxy- 2 -phenyl -ethyl) -methyl -amino] -pyrimido [2,1- a] isoquinolin-4 -one (Compound 16)
Off-white crystalline solid (0.115 g, 0.33 mmol, 66% yield) , mp 195-196 °C. UN λmax = 354, 334.5, 320, 259, 232, 200 nm (Methanol) . ESMS m/z = 346 (M+l) . XH ΝMR (200MHz, CDC13) δ2.94(3H, s) ; 3.99(2H, m) ; 4.60(lH,s) ; 5.13 (IH, m) ; 5.54 (IH, s) ; 7.04 (IH, d) ; 7.36 (5H, m) ; 7.71 (3H, m) ; 8.65 (IH, d) ;
8.82(1H, m) . Anal Calcd for C2ιH19 3θ2. 0.15CH3OH: C, 72.48; H, 5.65; N, 11.98. Found: C, 72.57; H, 5.51; N, 11.89
3- [Methyl- (4-oxo-4H-pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin- 2 -yl) -amino] - propionitrile (Compound 17)
Off-white crystalline solid (0.067 g, 0.24 mmol, 48% yield) , mp 166-167 °C. UV λraax = 352, 334, 316, 200 nm (Methanol) . ESMS m/z = 279 (M+l) . 1H NMR (200MHz, CDC13) δ2.80(2H, t) ; 3.18(3H, s) ; 4.08(2H, t) ; 5.58(1H, s) ; 7.01(1H, d) ; 7.71 (3H, m) ; 8.68(1H, d) ; 8.76(1H, m) . Anal Calcd for Cι6Hι4N40: C,
69.05; H, 5.07; N, 20.13. Found: C, 68.47; H, 4.99; N, 19.93. 2- (2-Thiophen-2-yl-ethylamino) -pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4- one (Compound 18)
Off-white crystalline solid (0.115 g, 0.36 mmol, 72% yield), mp 162-163 °C . UN λmax = 352, 334, 318.5, 253, 229.5, 200 nm (Methanol). ESMS m/z = 322 (M+l), 301, 181. XH ΝMR (200MHz, CDC13) 83.15 (3H, m) ; 3.56 (2H, m) ; 5.07 (IH, s) ; 5.47 (IH, s) ; 6.73 (2H, m) ; 7.16 (2H, m) ; 7.61 (3H, m) ; 8.60 (IH, d) ; 8.75 (IH, m) . Anal. Calcd. for Cι8H15Ν3OS : C, 67.27; H, 4.70; N, 13.07 Found: C, 66.84; H, 4.57; N, 13.07.
2- (2, 3-Dihydroxypropylamino) -pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 19)
Off-white crystalline solid (0.045 g, 0.16 mmol, 32% yield), mp 215-216 °C . ESMS m/z = 286 (M+l), 157, 110. 1H NMR (200MHz, d6-DMSO) δl.l4(2H, m) ; 3.47 (2H, m) ; 3.78 (IH, m) ;
4.47(1H, t) ; 4.77(1H, t) ; 5.01(1H, d) ; 5.51(1H, s) ; 7.36(1H, d) ; 7.80(lH,m); 7.94 (2H, m) ; 8.63 (IH, d) ; 8.86 (IH, m)
2 - (2 -Hydroxypropylamd.no) -pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 20)
Off-white crystalline solid (0.072 g, 0.27 mmol, 54% yield), mp 199-200 °C. ESMS m/z = 270 (M+l), 179, 157, 133, 111. αH NMR (200MHz, d6-DMSO) δl.23(3H, d) ; 3.55 (2H, m) ; 3.95(2H, t) ; 4.93 (IH, d) ; 5.50(1H, s) ; 7.36(1H, d) ; 7.82 (lH,m); 7.95(2H, m) ; 8.63 (IH, d) ; 8.88 (IH, m)
2- [2-Hydroxy-2- (3-hydrox -phenyl) -ethylamino] -pyrimido [2, 1- a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 21)
Off-white crystalline solid (0.117 g, 0.34 mmol, 68% yield). mp 159-161 °C. UN λmax = 352.5, 333, 317, 257, 231, 200 n (Methanol). ESMS m/z = 348 (M+l), 239, 222, 133. XH ΝMR (200MHz, dg-DMSO) δ4.81(2H, m) ; 5.52 (IH, s) ; 5.64 (IH, d) ; 6.75(1H, m) ; 6.96(2H, m) ; 7.24(1H, t) ; 7.39(1H, d) ; 7.82(1H, m) ; 7.96 (2H, m) ; 8.65 (IH, d) ; 8.89 (IH, ) ; 9.48 (IH, br s) . Anal. Calcd. for C2oHι7N303 .0.3CH2C12: C, 65.07; H, 4.65; N, 11.19. Found: C, 65.05; H, 4.92; N, 11.06.
2- (2-Hydroxy-ethylamino) -pyrimido [2, 1-a] isoquinolin-4-one (Compound 22)
Off-white crystalline solid (0.091 g, 0.36 mmol, 72% yield) , mp 218-221 °C. UV λmax = 352, 333.5, 316, 226.5, 200 nm (Methanol) . ESMS m/z = 256 (M+l) , 229. E NMR (200MHz, CDC13) δ3.45(2H, m) ; 3.71 (2H, m) ; 4.92 (IH, t) ; 5.49 (IH, s) ; 7.39(1H, d) ; 7.83 (IH, m) ; 7.96(2H, m) ; 8.64(1H, d) ; 8.89(1H, m) . Anal. Calcd. for Cι4Hι3N302 : C, 65.87; H, 5.13; N, 16.46 Found: C, 65.40; H, 4.96; N, 16.12.
Additional examples of compounds synthesised using synthetic route 2 are given in the table below.
Compound Structure M
LC-MS
Figure imgf000094_0001
Route 3
Examples of compounds synthesised using synthetic route 3 and synthetic route 4 are listed in the following table. An asterix on the structure indicates the place at which the substituent and core structure are joined. So, for example, a
core structure of
Figure imgf000095_0001
defines a compound with
structure f
Figure imgf000095_0002
Compound No . R Mw Purity LC-MS
Figure imgf000095_0003
Figure imgf000095_0004
Compound No. Mw Purity LC-MS
Figure imgf000095_0005
Figure imgf000096_0001
The wavey bonds, m the structures of compounds 27 and 28 indicate a bond pointing either up or down (axial or equatorial positions) . The structures therefore represent a dimethylmorpholino group having a mixture of cis and trans methyl groups .
Route 4
Examples of compounds synthesised using synthetic route 4 are listed in the tables below .
Compound Structure Mw Purity No . LC-MS
Figure imgf000096_0002
Figure imgf000096_0003
Compound R Mw Purity No . LC-MS
30 283 95
Figure imgf000096_0004
33 O 330
A ■<r
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000097_0002
Compound No . R Mw Purity LC-MS
37 286 90
O rX*
Figure imgf000097_0003
39 316 90 .
40 300 85
,o
Figure imgf000097_0004
43 283 90
44 F 342 95 F-^— O* F 45 OH 302 85
O
Figure imgf000098_0001
Compound No . R Mw Purity LC-MS
Figure imgf000098_0002
47 CF, 326 85
Figure imgf000098_0003
Compound No . Mw Purity LC-MS
48 H 273 85
Figure imgf000098_0004
Compound No . Mw Purity LC-MS
49 373 95
Figure imgf000098_0005
Figure imgf000099_0001
Compound No . R Mw Purity LC-MS
Figure imgf000099_0002
260 90
Figure imgf000099_0003
261 90
Figure imgf000099_0004
56 330 90
Figure imgf000099_0005
Figure imgf000100_0001
71 298 95 d
Figure imgf000100_0002
Route 4a
Examples of compounds synthesised using synthetic route 4a are listed in the following tables .
Figure imgf000100_0003
Compound No . i R, Mw Purity LC-MS
73 H 339 85
Figure imgf000101_0001
78 H 343 95
<
Figure imgf000101_0002
80 H 355 90
81 ■o H 343 95
82 H 357 95
Figure imgf000101_0003
84
* \^ 381 95
^
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000103_0001
109 H 389 95
110 „OH H 405 95
Figure imgf000103_0002
112 H 354 90
^
113 OH H 359 90 114 H 399 90
OH
Figure imgf000103_0003
116 OH H 375 95 OH
Figure imgf000103_0004
118 H 414 90
^
Figure imgf000103_0005
Figure imgf000104_0001
Figure imgf000105_0001
Figure imgf000105_0002
Compound No . Ri R3 Mw Purity LC-MS
145 H 316 85 146 386 90
O
Figure imgf000105_0003
148 399 90
N—
Route 4b
Examples of compounds synthesised using synthetic route 4b are listed in the following tables .
Figure imgf000106_0001
Compound 2 Mw Puril No . LC-MS
149 H 339 90 150 H 399 90
Figure imgf000106_0002
152 H 315 85 153 H 341 85
Figure imgf000106_0003
155 H 371 90
Figure imgf000106_0004
159 H 343 90
Figure imgf000106_0005
Figure imgf000107_0001
178 H 459 90
Figure imgf000108_0001
184 ==\ ,o H 435 85 // OH
Figure imgf000108_0002
186 H 375 90
Figure imgf000108_0003
188 ,OH H 405 90
189 --≡N H 340 90 190 H 375 90
OH OH
Figure imgf000108_0004
Figure imgf000109_0001
201 .O \ H 373 90
Figure imgf000109_0002
204 o. H 385 90
Figure imgf000109_0003
210 H 397 90
Figure imgf000110_0001
222 371 90
HO
Figure imgf000110_0002
Compound No. Ri Mw Purity LC-MS
223 414 90
"l\
O' TFA salt
Route 4c(i)
Examples of compounds synthesised according to synthetic route 4c (i) are listed in the following tables.
Figure imgf000111_0001
Compound No. Ri , Mw Purity LC-MS
Figure imgf000111_0002
225 ^N H 326 90 226 H 361 90
"S
227 O I H 401 90
Figure imgf000111_0003
Figure imgf000112_0001
235 * * 341 90
V_7
Figure imgf000112_0002
Route 4c(ii )
Examples of compounds synthesised according to synthetic route 4c (ii) are listed in the following tables .
Figure imgf000112_0003
Compound No. Ri R2 Mw Purii LC-MS
238 H 357 85
Figure imgf000112_0004
Figure imgf000113_0001
251 H 395 85
252 *~^D^F H
— >—o 461 85
F F
253 H 437 85
O 0 —
254 H 391
*- 85
Figure imgf000113_0002
Figure imgf000114_0001
Route 4d(iii)
Examples of compounds synthesised according to synthetic method 4d(iii) (from a precusor synthesised according to route 4d(ii))are listed in the following tables.
Figure imgf000114_0002
Compound No. Mw Purity LC-MS
265 373.03 90
Y°
*
Figure imgf000114_0003
268 345 90
OH
269 387.06 90
.A-
Figure imgf000115_0001
271 397
(X 90
Figure imgf000115_0002
273 441.54 90
Cl
274 421.12 90
».
Figure imgf000115_0003
Figure imgf000115_0004
Compound No. Mw Purity LC-MS
Figure imgf000115_0005
Figure imgf000116_0001
Compound No . Mw Purity LC-MS
Figure imgf000116_0002
Route 4d(iv)
Examples of compounds made according to synthetic route 4d(iv) (from a precursor synthesised according to route 4d(i)) are listed in the tables below.
Figure imgf000116_0003
Compound No . Ri R2 Mw Purity
LC-MS
Figure imgf000116_0004
Route 4d(v)
Examples of compounds synthesised according to route 4d(v) (from a precursor synthesised according to route 4d(i)) are listed in the tables below.
Compound No.
Figure imgf000117_0001
Mw Purity LC-MS
Figure imgf000117_0002
Route 5 Compound 283
(a) Methyl 3 (4-chlorophenyl) 3-oxo-triphenylphosphanyl- propionate
Purification by column chromatography (ethyl acetate: petroleum ether 40-60°, 3:2) yielded to a white solid (3.41g, 77.2%); mp 136°C; IR (KBr/cπf1) : 3074, 3056, 2940, 1662, 1314,
1247, 1105, 1077, 752, 695; XH NMR (CDC13) δ= 3.07 (3H, s) , 7.18-7.72 (19H, m) ; MS m/z (El): 472.0993 (M+, Calcd 472.0995 for C28H2203PC1) , 472, 361, 277, 201, 163.
(b) Methyl 3- (4-chlorophenyl) propiolate
Purification by column chromatography (ethyl acetate: petroleum ether 40-60°, 15:85) yielded to a white solid (1.17g, 88.5%); mp 90°C; 1H NMR (CDC13) δ = 3.77 (s, 3H) , 7.27-7.65 (4H, m) ; IR (KBr/crrf1) : 3049, 3035, 2964, 2226, 1718, 1489, 1293, 1170, 823, 721; HRMS m/z (El) : 194.0130 (M+, Calcd 194.0135 for C10H7O2Cl) , 194, 163, 136, 99, 74.
(c) 4- [ (4-chlorophenyl) -2-oxo-3-butynyl) carbonyl] morpholine lithium salt yielded to a white solid (0.42g, 50%) ; mp >320°C; XH NMR (d6~ DMSO) δ = 3.46 (4H, m) , 3.61 (4H, m) , 5.06 (IH, m) , 7.56 (4H, s) ; IR (KBr/crrf1) : 3407, 3091, 2961, 2200, 1571, 1506, 1230, 1116, 961, 755; HRMS m/z (El) : 291.0445 (M+, Calcd 291.0662 C15H14C1N03) , 291, 263, 163, 136, 86.
(d) 6- (4-chlorophenyl) -2- (4 -morpholinyl) -4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 284) Purification by column chromatography (ethyl acetate: petroleum ether 40-60°, 15:85) yielded to a white solid (0.15g, 50%) ; mp 250°C; IR (KBr/crrf1) : 3071, 2965, 1643, 1559, 1410, 1124, 899, 854; XH NMR (CDCl3) δ = 3.41 (4H, t) , 3.83 (4H, t) , 5.45 (IH, d) , 6.51 (IH, d) , 7.42 (2H, d) ; 7.58 (2H, d) ; HRMS m/z (El) : 291.0666 (M+, Calcd 291.0662 for C15H1403NC1) , 291- 293, 263-265, 205-207, 136-138; UV: λmax(MeOH) = 354.0 nm; Anal. Calcd for C15Hι403NCl . 0.1H2O: C, 61.38; H, 4.88; N, 4.77; Cl, 12.08. Found: C, 61.58; H, 4.99; N, 4.34; Cl, 12.40.
2- (4-Morpholinyl) -6-phenyl-4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 285)
Pale green solid (0.38g, 63%) ; mp 148-150°C; IR (KBr/cπf1) : 1648, 1561, 1230, 1108, 1030, 896, 775. ^ NMR: δ(d6-DMSO) : 3.55 (4H, m, CH2N) , 3.85 (4H, m, CH20) , 5.54 (IH, d) , 6.75 (IH, d) , 7.63 (3H, m, Ar-H) , 8.00 (2H, m, Ar - H) ; HRMS m/z (El) :
257.1047 (M+, Calcd 257.1052 for C1SH15N03) , 257, 229, 200, 171, 131, 111, 102, 86, 77; Anal. Calcd for C15Hι5N03 H20 : C, 68.53; H, 5.71; N, 5.33. Found: C, 68.53; H, 5.90; N, 5.14.
6- (2-methoxyphenyl) -2- (4 -morpholinyl) -4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 286)
White solid (0.297g, 23%) ; mp 125-127°C; IR (KBr/crrf1) : 3077, 3001, 2968, 1641, 1604, 1562, 1404, 1241, 1121, 1019, 862, 761; αH NMR (CDCl3) δ = 3.34 (4H, t) , 3.75 (4H, t) , 3.83 (3H, s) , 5.39 (IH, d) , 6.72 (IH, d) , 6.93-7.01 (2H, m) , 7.33-7.52 (2H, m) ; HRMS /z (El) : 287.1171 (M+, Calcd 287.1158 for C16H1704N) , 287, 259, 244, 131, 111; UV: λmax(MeOH) = 358nm; Anal. Calcd for CleHι704N . 0.2H2O: C, 66.06; H, 6.03; N, 4.81. Found: C, 66.13; H, 5.90; N, 4.73.
6- (3-methoxyphenyl) -2- (4 -morpholinyl) -4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 287)
White solid (1.33g, 99%) ; mp 115-117°C; IR (KBr/cπf1) : 3078, 2975, 1647, 1536, 1420, 1239, 1123, 879, 793; 2H NMR (CDCl3) δ = 3.41 (4H, t) , 3.84 (7H, m) , 5.45 (IH, d) , 6.53 (IH, d) , 6.97- 7.41 (4H, m) ; HRMS m/z (El) : 287.1154 (M+, Calcd 287.1158 for C16Hι704N) , 287, 259, 200, 173, 135, 102; UV: λmax(MeOH) = 356nm; Anal. Calcd for C16H1704N: C, 66.67; H, 5.93; N, 4.62. Found: C, 66.9; H, 5.93; N, 4.62.
6- (4-methoxyphenyl) -2- (4-morpholinyl) -4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 288)
White solid (1.29g, 96%) ; mp 220°C; IR (KBr/crrf1) : 3085, 2968, 1649, 1600, 1513, 1405, 1259, 1190, 835; XH NMR (CDCl3) δ = 3.40 (4H, t) , 3.82 (4H, t) , 3.84 (3H, s) , 5.41 (IH, d) , 6.43 (IH, d) , 6.95 (d, 2H) , 7.59 (d, 2H) ; HRMS m/z (El) : 287.1158
(M+, Calcd 287.1158 for CιeH1704N) , 287, 287, 259, 201, 132; UV: λraax(MeOH) = 358nm; Anal. Calcd for C16H1704N: C, 66.67; H, 5.93; N, 4.62. Found: C, 66.58; H, 5.90; N, 4.84.
6- (4-tert-butylphenyl) -2- (4 -morpholinyl) -4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 289)
White solid (0.94g, 75.5%) ; mp 156°C; IR (KBr/crrf1) : 3071, 3058, 2960, 1648, 1571, 1404, 1362, 1121, 900, 826; ^Η NMR (CDC13) δ = 1.28 (9H, s) , 3.37 (4H, t) , 3.78 (4H, t) , 5.39 (IH, d) , 6.47 (IH, d) , 7.42 (2H, d) , 7.54 (2H, d) ; HRMS m/z (El) : 313.1684 (M+, Calcd 313.1678 for C19H2303N) , 313, 285, 270, 256, 213, 143; UN: λmax(MeOH) = 358nm; Anal. Calcd for Cι9H2303Ν . 0.2H2O: C, 71.99; H, 7.44; N, 4.42. Found: C, 72.14; H, 7.35; N, 4.44.
6- (2-fluorophenyl) -2- (4 -morpholin l) -4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 290)
White solid (0.67g, 76%) ; mp 137-138°C; IR: (KBr) / (cm-1) : 3059, 3028, 2928, 1640, 1570, 1405, 1119, 756; XH NMR (CDC13) δ = 3.38 (4H, t) , 3.76 (4H, t) , 5.40 (IH, d) , 6.54 (IH, d) , 7.07- 7.23 (2H, m) , 7.34-7.57 (2H, m) ; HRMS (El) m/z 275.0950 [M+ calcd 275.0958 for Cι5H1403NF] , 275, 247, 189, 161/ 134, 120, 86; UV: λmax(MeOH) = 244.5nm; Anal. Calcd for C10H7O2F . 0.2CH2C12: C, 64.6; H, 5.2; N, 5.0. Found: C, 64.8; H, 5.0; N, 4.9.
6- (3-fluorophenyl) -2- (4 -morpholinyl) -4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 291)
White solid (O.lOg, 11%) ; mp 169-170°C; IR: (KBr) / (cm-1) : 3055, 2929, 1650, 1564, 1403, 1245, 1114, 877; XH NMR (CDC13) δ = 3.39 (4H, t) , 3.76 (4H, t) , 5.40 (IH, d) , 6.49 (IH, d) , 7.08- 7.45 (4H, m) ; HRMS (El) /z 275.0946 [M+ calcd 275.0958 for C15Hι 03NF] , 275, 247, 189, 161, 120, 95; UV: λmax(MeOH) = 247nm; Anal. Calcd for C10H7O2F . 0.5 CH2C12: C, 58.6; H, 4.8; N, 4.4. Found: C, 58.8; H, 4.6; N, 4.3.
6- (4-fluorophenyl) -2- (4 -morpholinyl) -4H-pyran-4-one (Compound 292)
White solid (0.319g, 82%) ; mp 216-217 °C; IR (KBr/crrf1) : 3065, 3010, 2969, 2910, 1641, 1560, 1411, 1239, 1123, 856, 784; E NMR (CDC13) δ = 3.36 (4H, t) , 3.78 (4H, t) , 5.39 (IH, d) , 6.43 (IH, d) , 7.04-7.16 (2H, m) , 7.55-7.65 (2H, m) ; HRMS (El) m/z 275.0946 [M+ calcd 275.0958 for C15Hα403NF] , 275, 247, 210, 182, 120, 86; UV: λmax (MeOH) = 247nm; Calcd for Ci0H7O2F . 0.3CH2C12: C, 61.1; H, 4.9; N, 4.7. Found: C, 61.4; H, 4.4; N, 4.7.
Route 6 Compound 293
(a) Methyl 1 -hydroxy- 2 -naphthoate.
Prepared from 1- hydroxy- 2 -naphthoic acid (9.4 g, 50 mmol), affording 2.85g (14 mmol, 28% yield) as an off white solid: mp 78-79 °C. IR (KBr) : 3051; 2953; 1662; 1635; 1438; 1336; 772 cm"1. NMR (200 MHz., CDC13) δ 3.91 (3H, s) ; 7.19 (IH, d, J = 9 Hz.) ; 7.48 (2H, m) ; 7.68 (2H, d, J" = 9 Hz . ) ; 8.33 (IH, d, J" = 8 Hz.); 11.88 (IH, s) . EIMS m/z = 202 (M+) ; 170; 114.
(b) 1- (l-Hydroxynaphth-2-yl) -3- (morpholin-4-yl) -propan-1,3- dione .
Prepared from methyl 1-hydroxy-2 -naphthoate (2.28 g, 11.3 mmol), affording 2.49 g (8.3 mmol, 74% yield) of the title compound as an off-white powder. mp 128-130 °C. IR (KBr) 1658; 1620; 1223; 1114; 804 cm"1. ^ NMR (200 MHz., de-DMS0) δ 3.61 (4H, m) ; 3.72 (4H, m) ; 4.50 ( 2H, s) ; 7.49 (IH, d, 8.9 Hz.); 7.72 (IH, dt , J =1.2 Hz., 7.5 Hz.); 7.85 (IH, dt , J = 1.2 Hz., 8.2 Hz.); 7.92 (IH, d, J = 8.9 Hz.); 8.03 (IH, d, 8.0 Hz.); 8.46 (IH, d, 8.2 Hz.); 13.72 (IH, bs) . EIMS m/z = 299 (M+) ; 212; 170; 87.
(c) 7, 8-Benzo-2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 293) Prepared from 1- (l-hydroxynaphth-2-yl) -3- (morpholin-4-yl) - propan-1, 3-dione (2.4 g, 8.0 mmol), affording 1.43 g (5.1 mmol, 63% yield) of the desired compound as white crystals, mp 267-269 °C. IR (KBr) 1641; 1626; 1605; 1509; 1562; 1420; 1240; 117; 920 cm"1. 1H NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 3.74 (4H, m) ; 3.91 (4H, ) ; 5.79 (2H, s) ; 7.88 (IH, d, 8.9 Hz.); 8.02 (2H, m) ; 8.16 (IH, m) , 8.56 (IH, m) . EIMS m/z = 281 (M+) ; 224; 196; 170.
8-Phenyl-2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4 -one (Compound 294) Off-white powder (0.770 g, 2.51 mmol, 74% yield): mp 183- 185°C. IR (KBr) : 3419; 1621; 1563; 1414; 1252; 1119; 990; 755; 700 cm"1. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 3.45 (4H, m, morpholine); 3.74 (4H, m, morpholine); 5.66 (IH, s, chromenone 3-H) ; 7.57 (4H, m) ; 7.73 (3H, ) ; 8.06 (IH, m) . 13C NMR (50 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 44.8; 65.5; 86.4; 123.5; 124.4; 125.1;
128.4; 128.8; 129.7; 130.2; 133.5; 136.0; 150.4; 162.5; 175.4. EIMS m/z = 307 (M+) ; 292; 250; 222; 196; 168; 139. Anal. Calcd for Cι9H17NO3-0.2H20: C, 73.39; H, 5.64; N, 4.50. Found: C, 73.36; H, 5.21; N, 4.22.
2-piperidin-l-yl-benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 295)
Pale brown solid. (0.034 g, 0.12 mmol, 32% yield) mp 205-207 °C. XH NMR (200MHz, d6-DMSO) δ 1.69 (6H, s) ; 3.56 (4H, s) ; 5.59 (IH, s) ; 7.55 (2H, m) ; 7.83 (2H, q) ; 8.21 (IH, d) ; 8.24 (IH, m) . EIMS m/z = 279 (M+), 224, 170, 127, 114, 87. Anal. Calcd for C18Hι7N02 . 0.1 CH2C12: C, 75.53; H, 6.02; N, 4.87. Found: C, 75.81; H, 5.80; N, 4.82.
2- (Thiomorpholin-4-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 296) Orange solid. (0.39 g, 1.31 mmol, 46% yield) , mp 171-173 °C. FT-IR 3087, 2963, 1642, 1604, 1562 cm"1. αH NMR (200 MHz, d6- DMSO) δ 2.86 (4H, m) ; 4.06 (4H, m) ; 5.80 (IH, s) ; 7.84 (2H, m) ; 8.00 (2H, q) ; 8.12 (IH, m) ; 8.46 (IH, m) ; EIMS m/z = 297(M+), 224, 170, 127, 114, 87. Anal. Calcd for C17Hι5N02S . 0.3 CH3COOC2H5: C, 67.39; H, 5.45; N, 4.29. Found: C, 67.22; H, 5.14; N, 4.14.
Compound 297
Synthesis of starting material 5, 6, 1, 8-Tetrahydro-l-hydroxy-2-naphthoic acid.
A mixture of 5, 6, 7, 8-tetrahydro-l-naphthol (7.42 g, 50 mmol) and potassium carbonate (25.5 g, 185 mmol) were placed in a glass tube inside a stainless steel pressure reactor. The reactor was charged with C02 at 40 bar and then heated to 145°C. The pressure rose to 60 bar and then slowly dropped to 20 bar over the 3 day reaction period. The bomb was cooled and the solid product was taken up in water (-500 ml) and acetone (~500 ml) . The mixture was evaporated in vacuo to remove the acetone and then washed with DCM (3 x 150 ml) . The aqueous was acidified with 2M hydrochloric acid to give a white suspension. This was extracted with DCM (4 x 250 ml) , which was then dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo to give the crude product. This was recrystallised from aqueous ethanol and dried under high vacuum to provide 8.64 g (45 mmol, 90% yield) of the title compound as a pale brown powder. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 1.81 (4H, m) ; 2.67 (2H, m) ; 2.81 (2H, m) ; 6.73 (IH, d) ; 7.61 (IH, d) ; 11.78 (IH, bs) . EIMS m/z = 192 (M+) ; 174; 146 7,8,9, 10-Tetrahydrobenzo [h] -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 297)
Off-white powder: mp 220-222 °C. IR (KBr): 1628; 1592; 1561; 1246; 1116; 790 cm"1. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 1.87 (4H, m) ; 2.90 (4H, m) ; 3.59 (4H, m) ; 3.82 (4H, m) ; 5.56 (IH, s) ; 7.17 (IH, d) ; 7.72 (IH, d) . EIMS m/z = 285 (M+) ; 270; 228; 200; 175; 146. Anal. Calcd for Cι7H19N03 : C, 71.56; H, 6.71; N, 4.91. Found: C, 71.49; H, 6.76; N, 4.83.
Compound 298
Alternative step (a) for this compound Methyl 5-bromo-2 -hydroxybenzoate .
Prepared from 5-bromo-2-hydroxybenzoic acid (3.26 g, 15 mmol) according to general method A, affording 2.45 g (10.6 mmol,
71% yield) as an off-white powder. aH NMR (200 MHz., CDC13) δ 3.89 (3H, s, CH3) ; 6.81 (IH, d, J = 8.8 Hz., 3-H); 7.46 (IH, dd, J = 8.8, 2.5 Hz., 4-H) ; 7.89 (IH, d, J" = 2.5 Hz . , 6-H) ; 10.62 (IH, s, OH) .
Methyl 2-hydroxy-5-phenylbenzoate.
A solution of phenylboronic acid (1.34 g, 11.0 mmol) and methyl 5-bromo-2-hydroxybenzoate (2.42 g, 10.5 mmol) in acetone (25 ml) was treated with water (30 ml) , followed by potassium carbonate (3.77 g, 27.3 mmol) and finally, palladium (II) acetate (0.16 g, 0.7 mmol) . Upon addition of the palladium, the reaction mixture rapidly darkened. The reaction mixture was heated to reflux and stirred for 6 h. After cooling the dark mixture, ether (40 ml) was added, stirred vigorously and decanted. This extraction process was repeated an additional four times. The ethereal extracts were dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo to give a yellow liquid. The crude product was dissolved in petrol and loaded onto a silica flash column. The column was eluted with petrol, followed by 5-10% ethyl acetate in petrol. The second product collected was evaporated in vacuo and then recrystallised from petrol to provide a white crystalline solid (1.35 g, 5.90 mmol, 56% yield). XH NMR (200 MHz., d6- DMSO) δ 4.05 (3H, s) ; 7.20 (IH, ) ; 7.50-7.58 (3H, m)"; 7.74 (2H, m) ; 7.97 (IH, m) ; 8.13 (IH, m) ; 10.67 (IH, s, OH).
2- (Morpholin-4-yl) -6-phenylchromen-4-one (Compound 298) Off-white powder: mp 218-220 °C. 2H NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 3.66 (4H, m) ; 3.85 (4H, m) ; 5.68 (IH, s, 3-H); 7.57 (3H, m) ; 7.72 (IH, d, 8-H); 7.83 (2H, m) ; 8.08 (IH, dd, 7-H) ; 8.24 (IH, d, 5-H) . EIMS m/z = 307 (M+) ; 196; 168. IR (KBr): 1611; 1558; 1428; 1245; 1119; 768 cm"1. Anal. Calcd. for C19Hι7NO3-0.2H2O: C, 73.39; H, 5.64; N, 4.50. Found: C, 73.41; H, 5.45; N, 4.28.
7- (2, 6-Dichlorobenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen-4 -one (Compound 299) Off-white powder. E NMR (200Mhz, d6-DMSO) δ 3.62 (4H, m) ; 3.82 (4H, ) ; 5.44 (2H, s) ; 5.55 (IH, s) ; 7.13 (IH, dd, J = 2.4, 8.8 Hz.) ; 7.43 (IH, d, J = 2.4 Hz.) ; 1.51-1.13 (3H, m) ; 7.94 (IH, d, J = 8.8 Hz.)
2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 300)
White powder. mp 143 °C. IR: (KBr) / (cm"1) : 3067, 3035, 2960, 1620, 1555, 1410, 1252, 1122, 1068, 770. ^ NMR: δ(ds-DMSO) : 3.19 (4H, t, =4.5, CH2N) ; 3.87 (4H, t, J=4.5 , CH20) ; 5.67 (IH, s, H-4) ; 7.26 (2H, m, Ar-H) ; 7.49 (2H, m, Ar-H) . HRMS m/z (El) : 231.0890 (M+, Calcd 231.0895 for Cι3Hι3N03) , 214, 202, 172, 145, 118, 101, 89, 77. Anal. Calcd for Cι3H13N03 : C, 67.52; H, 5.67; N, 6.06. Found: C, 67.28; H, 5.43; N, 5.81. 2-morpholin-benzo<g>-chromen-4-one (Compound 301)
Pale brown solid. mp 219 °C. IR (KBr) / (cm-1) : 3048, 2906, 2869, 1598, 1569, 1464, 1424, 1356, 1252, 1118, 791. ^Η NMR: δ(d6-DMSO) : 3.60 (4H, t, =4.5, CH2N) ; 3.88 (4H, t, J=4.5,
CH30) ; 5.54 (IH, s, H-4) ; 7.55 (IH, m, Ar-H) ; 7.74 (IH, m, Ar- H) ; 8.04 (IH, , Ar-H) ; 8.74 (IH, m, Ar-H) . HRMS m/z (El) : 281.1038 (M+, Calcd 281.1052 for C17H15N03) , 224, 196, 170, 142, 127, 114, 98. Anal. Calcd for C17H15N03 . 0.25 H20 : C, 71.43; H, 5.25; N, 4.90. Found: C, 71.37; H, 5.04; N, 4.85.
8-Methyl-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 302)
Orange solid. mp 148 °C. IR: (KBr) / (cm"1) : 3069, 2963, 2860, 1629, 1570, 1411, 1251, 1118, 778. XH NMR: δ(d6-DMS0) : 2.51 (3H, s, Me) ; 3.60 (4H, t, J=5, CH2N) ; 3.85 (4H, t, J=5, CH20) ;
5.62 (IH, s, H-4); 7.37 (IH, m, Ar-H); 7.61 (IH, m, Ar-H) ; 7.86 (IH, m, Ar-H) . HRMS /z (El) : 245.1052 (M+, Calcd 245.1052 for C14Hι5N03) , 230, 188, 160, 134, 114, 106, 86, 77. Anal. Calcd for Cι4Hι5N03 . 0.2 H20: C, 67.55; H, 6.03; N, 5.63. Found: C, 67.65; H, 6.06; N, 5.16.
8-Methoxy-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 303)
Yellow solid. mp 165 °C. IR : (KBr) / (cm"1) : 3085, 2949, 2857, 1638, 1599, 1571, 1411, 1245, 1116, 773. XE NMR: δ(d6-DMSO) : 3.51 (4H, t, J=4.5, CH2N) ; 3.81 (4H, t, J=4.5, CH20) ; 3.91 (3H, S, MeO) ; 5.48 (IH, s, H-4) ; 7.06 (IH, m, Ar-H); 7.22 (IH, m, Ar-H); 7.6 (IH, m, Ar-H) . HRMS m/z (El) : 261.0991 (M+, Calcd 261.1001 for Cι4Hι5N04) , 204, 151, 122, 114, 107, 92.
7-Methoxy-2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 304)
Off-white powder: mp 174-175 °C. E NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 3.57 (4H, m) ; 3.81 (4H, m) ; 3.94 (3H, s) ; 5.50 (IH, s) ; 7.03 (IH, dd) ; 7.16 (IH, dd) ; 7.90 (IH, d) . 13C NMR (50 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 56.17; 65.66; 86.07; 100.65; 113.36; 116.39; 126.15; 155.15; 162.63; 162.95; 175.39 ESMS m/z = 261 (M+) , 204
Compound 305 and 306
Figure imgf000127_0001
Compound Substituent Mw
Figure imgf000127_0002
Figure imgf000127_0003
Compound Substituent Mw
Figure imgf000127_0004
Synthesis of starting material Methyl 2 , 3 -dihydroxybenzoate
Prepared from 2 , 3-Dihydroxybenzoic acid (1 g, 7.25 mmol), affording a pale brown solid (0.29 g, 1.73 mmol, 23 % yield) ; mp 81.1-81.9°C. ; Rf = 0.78 (solvent 95% DCM: 5% methanol); XH NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.35 (IH, d, Ar4) , 7.15 (IH, d, Ar6) , 6.85 (IH, dd, Ar5) , 4.00 (3H, d, CH3) . Preparation of 2-Hydroxy-3 -trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy-benzoic acid methyl ester
To a sample of methyl 2 , 3-dihydroxybenzoate (4.00 g, 23.80 mmol) dissolved in dichloromethane (25ml), pyridine (0.96 ml, 11.9 mmol) was added and dimethylaminopyridine (0,07 g, 0.58 mmol) . The mixture was cooled to 0 C and trifluromethane sulfonic anhydride (4.40 ml, 26.18 mmol) was added dropwise by syringe. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and left to stir for 60 h. The organic layer was washed with 1M HCI (40 ml) , dried (Na2S04) and concentrated to dryness in vacuo. The solid was recrystallized from ethyl acetate to yield white crystals. (2.62g, 8.73 mmol, 37 % yield), mp 91.8- 92.3°C; Rf = 0.89 (solvent; 95% DCM : 5 % methanol); ES+(m/e) 300.00 (M+l); HPLC retention time = 7.47 min (long); XH NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ7.85 (IH, d, Ar4) , 7.45 (IH, d, Ar6) , 6.95 (IH, t, Ar5), 4.00 (3H, d, CH3)
Preparation of 2 -Hydroxy-4-trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy-benzoic acid methyl ester Prepared as for 2-Hydroxy-3-trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy- benzoic acid methyl ester, from methyl 2,4-dihydroxybenzoate affording a white crystalline solid. ES+(m/e) 300.00 (M+l)
(b) Trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid 2-hydroxy-3- (3-morpholin-4- yl-3-oxo-propionyl) -phenyl ester.
Preapared from 2 -Hydroxy-3-trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy-benzoic acid methyl ester (2.10 g, 7 mmol), affording a pale brown solid (1.10 g, 2.54 mmol, 36 % yield). ES+ (m/e) 398.25; E NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ7.85 (IH, d, Ar4), 7.35 (IH, d, Ar6) , 6.90 (IH, dd, Ar5) , 4.05 (2H, s, CH20) , 3.50 (8H, m, CH2N, CH20) . (c) Trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid 2-morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H- chromen-8-yl ester (Compound 305)
Prepared from Trifluoromethanesulfonic acid 2-hydroxy-3- (3- morpholin-4 -yl-3 -oxo-propionyl) -phenyl ester (0.91 g, 2.3 mmol), affording a white solid (0.25 g, 0.662 mmol, 28.79% yield) mp 177.8-178.9°C . Rf = 0.30 (5% MeOH : 95% DCM). ES+(m/e) 380.16 (M+l). E NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ3.50 (4H, m, CH2N) ; 3.78 (4H, m, CH20) ; 5.46 (IH, s, Ar3); 7.40 (2H, m, Ar6, 7) ; 8.09 (IH, m, Ar5) .
Trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid 2-morpholin-4-yl-4-oxo-4H- chromen-7-yl ester (Compound 306)
Prepared from Trifluoromethanesulfonic acid 3-hydroxy-4- (3- morpholin-4-yl-3-oxo-propionyl) -phenyl ester (1.50 g, 3.80 mmol), affording a white solid (0.69 g, 1.83 mmol, 48% yield) mp 143-145 °C; ES+(m/e) = 380.21 (M+l); XH NMR (300MHz, CDC13) δ3.45(4H, m, CH2N) ; δ3.77(4H, m, CH2Q) ; δ5.36(lH, s, CH) ; δ7.32(2H, m) ; δ8.01(lH, m) .
Further derivatisation
7-Hydroxy-2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 307)
To a mixture of 7- (2 , 6-dichlorobenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) - chromen-4-one (6.60 g, 16.2 mmol) (299) and 10% Pd/C (150 mg) was added methanol (150 ml) , under nitrogen. The suspension was stirred under an atmosphere of hydrogen for 40 h. The catalyst was removed by filtration through Celite, washing with methanol . The solvent was removed by evaporation in vacuo to provide an off-white solid. This was treated with fresh catalyst, re-suspended in methanol under nitrogen and stirred under an atmosphere of hydrogen for a further 72 h.
The catalyst was removed by filtration through Celite, washing with methanol. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo and the crude product re-crystallised from methanol to provide 2.26 g (9.1 mmol, 57%) of the desired compound as a white solid. mp > 250 °C (deco p) . XH NMR (200Mhz, ds-DMSO) δ 3.78 (4H, m) ; 3.86 (4H, m) ; 6.15 (IH, s) ; 7.05-7.13 (2H, m) ; 7.93 (IH, d) ; 11.3 (IH, bs) . ESMS m/z = 247 (M+) , 190, 105.
Route 7a
Examples of compounds synthesised using synthetic route 7a are listed in the following table. All examples of compounds synthesised by this route were isolated with a purity of at least 99%.
Figure imgf000130_0001
Compound Substituent Mw LC-MS
308 *—Br 310.24
Compound Structure Mw LC-MS
Figure imgf000130_0002
(a) 4-Hydroxy-benzo [f] -chromen-2-thione. Prepared from 2 -hydroxy- 1-acetonaphthone (3.72 g, 20.0 mmol) affording 1.96 g (8.6 mmol, 13% yield) as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 6.97 (IH, s) ; 7.73-7.90 (3H, m) ; 8.20 (IH, d) ; 8.40 (IH, d) ; 9.43 (IH, d) . EIMS m/z = 228 (M+) ; 209; 170; 142; 69.
4-Hydroxy-benzo- [h] -chromen-2-thione
Prepared from 1-hydroxy-2-acetonaphthone (3.72 g, 20 mmol) affording 1.09 g (5.32 mmol, 29% yield) as orange crystals, mp 221-223 °C . 1H NMR (200 MHz, d6-DMS0) δ 4.21 (IH, bs) ; 6.89 (IH, s) ; 7.91 (2H, m) ; 7.99 (2H, ) ; 8.18 (IH, m) ; 8.56 (IH, m)
6-Bromo-4-hydroxy-chromene-2 -thione
Prepared from 5-Bromo-2-hydroxyacetophenone (4.30 g, 20 mmol), affording a yellow powder (1.85 g 7.20 mmol, 36 %) ; ES+ (m/e) = 258(M++1)
(b) 2- (Ethylthio) -benzo [f] -chromen-4-one.
Yellow crystalline solid: mp 126-127 °C. IR (KBr) 1632; 1437; 815 cm"1. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMS0) δ 1.48 (3H, t, CH2CH3) ; 3.32 (2H, q, CH2CH3) ; 6.62 (IH, s, 3-H); 7.73-7.91 (3H, m) ; 8.19 (IH, d) ; 8.41 (IH, d) ; 10.01 (IH, d) . EIMS m/z = 256 (M+) ; 170; 142. Anal. Calcd for C15Hι2O2S-0.1H20: C, 69.80; H, 4.76. Found: C, 69.77; H, 4.53.
2-Ethylsulphanyl-benzo- [h] -chromen-4-one
Pale brown crystals (0.42 g , 2.85 mmol, 62% yield) . mp 116- 117°C XH NMR (200 Mhz, ds-DMSO) δl.45 (3H, t , J = 7.4 Hz); 3.13 (2H, q, J = 7.4 Hz); 6.36 (IH, s) ; 7.65 (4H, m) ; 8.06 (IH, m) ; 8.41 (IH, m) 6-Bromo-2-ethylsulfanyl-chromen-4-one
Prepared from 6-Bromo-4-hydroxy-chromene-2-thione (0.57 g, 2.21 mmol), ethyl iodide (0.65 ml, 8 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.35 g, 2.5 mmol) affording a yellow solid (0.40 g, 1.40 mmol, 63 %) ; ES+ (m/e) = 287 (M++l)
(c) 2- (Morpholin-4-yl) -benzo [f] -chromen-4-one (Compound 310).
Prepared from 2- (ethylthio) -benzo [f] -chromen-4 -one (0.512 g, 2.0 mmol) . Recrystallisation from methanol provided 0.238 g (0.84 mmol, 42% yield) of an off-white crystalline solid: mp 213-214 °C. IR (KBr) : 2956; 2861; 1639; 1601; 1590; 1567; 1512; 1420; 1252; 1246; 1115; 821 cm"1. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6- DMSO) δ 3.64 (4H, m) ; 3.86 (4H, m) ; 5.78 (IH, s, chromenone 3-H) ; 7.67-7.84 (3H, m) ; 8.14 (IH, d) ; 8.32 (IH, d) ; 10.16 (IH, d) . EIMS m/z = 281 (M+) ; 253; 224; 196; 170.
6-Bromo-2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 308)
Prepared from 6-Bromo-2 -ethylsulfanyl-chromen-4 -one (0.375 g, 1.35 mmol) and morpholine (0.54 ml, 6.25 mmol), affording a pale yellow solid. (.0354 g, 1.14 mmol, 84 %) ; m.p. 147-149°C; ES+(m/e) = 310.24 (M++l) ; (200MHz, CDC13) δ3.44(4H, m) ; 3.77 (4H, m) ; 5.42 (IH, s) ; 7.11 (IH, d) ; 7.57 (IH, dd) ; 8.20 (IH, d)
2- (2 , 6-cis-dimethyl-morpholin-4-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 309)
Off white solid (0.174 g, .56 mmol, 56 %) : m.p. 211-212.5°C;
ES+(m/e) 310 (M+l); Rf = 0.30 (5%Methanol /DCM); 2H NMR
(200MHz, CDC13) δl.27(6H, d) ; 2.74 (2H, t) ; 3.72 (2H, m) ; 3.86 (2H, d) ; 5.56 (IH, s) ; 7.58 (2H, m) ; 7.67 (IH, d) ; 7.86 (IH, m) ; 8.08 (IH, d) ; 8.19(1H, m) (d) 2-Piperazin-l-yl-benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 311)
Prepared from 2 - ethyl sulphanyl -benzo [h] chromen- 4 -one (0.384 g, 1.5 mmol) and piperazine (1.29 g, 15 mmol) . Recrystallisation from ethyl acetate provided an off white solid. (0.121 g, 0.43 mmol, 28% yield) mp 208-209 °C. UN λmax = 317.0, 273.0, 255.0, 216.5 nm (Methanol) . XE ΝMR (200 MHz, CDC13) δ 3.01 (4H, m) ; 3.55 (4H, m) ; 5.57 (IH, s) ; 7.56 (2H, m) ; 7.66 (IH, d) ; 7.85 (IH, m) ; 8.08 (IH, d) ; 8.21 (IH, m) . EIMS m/z (EI+) : 280 (M+) , 261, 238, 225, 170, 139. Anal. Calcd for C17H16Ν2O2.0.3H2O: C, 71.46; H, 5.81; N, 9.80. Found: C, 71.88; H, 5.91; N, 9.33.
2- ( yrrol idinyl) -benzo [h] chromen- 4 -one (Compound 312)
Off white solid. (0.104 g, 0.39 mmol, 26% yield) mp 234-236 °C. XE NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.05 (4H, m) ; 3.55 (4H, m) ; 5.36 (IH,
S) ; 7.55 (2H, m) ; 7.65 (IH, d) ; 7.83 (IH, m) ; 8.10 (IH, d) ;
8.19(1H, m) . EIMS m/z (EI+) : 265 (M+) , 210, 196, 170, 114,
95. Anal. Calcd for C17H15N02. 0.28CH2C12: C, 71.70; H, 5.42;
N, 4.84. Found: C, 71.43; H, 5.76; N, 4.75.
2- (3 -Hydroxymethyl -piperidin-1-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one
( Compound 313)
Off white solid. (0.131 g, 0.42 mmol, 43% yield) mp 209-210
°C. UV λmax = 319.0, 284.0, 274.0, 254.0, 217.0 nm (Methanol) . FT-IR 3300, 2924, 2854, 1640, 1609, 1559, 1439 cm"
1. NMR (200 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.30(1H, m) ; 1.79(4H, m) ;
3.14(2H, m) ; 3.51(1H, m) ; 3.65(1H, M) ; 3.98(lH,m); 4.14 (IH, m) ; 5.64(1H, s) ; 7.49 (2H, m) ; 7.60 (IH, d) ; 7.77 (IH, m) ;
8.02 (IH, d) ; 8.17(1H, m) . EIMS m/z (EI+) : 309 (M+) , 292, 278, 224, 196, 170, 138, 82, 55. Anal. Calcd for C19H19N03. 0.1H2O:
C, 73.34; H, 6.32; N, 4.50. Found: C, 73.28; H, 6.19; N, 4.13 2- (4-Methyl-piperazin-l-yl) -benzo [ ] chromen-4-one (Compound 314)
White solid. (0.194 g, 0.66 mmol, 67% yield) mp 184-185 °C. UV λmax = 316.0, 272.0, 254.5, 218.0 nm (Methanol) . H NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.32 (3H, s) ; 2.54 (4H, t) ; 3.60 (4H, t) ;
5.59 (IH, s) ; 7.56 (2H, m) ; 7.67 (IH, d) ; 7.83 (IH, m) ; 8.08 (IH, d) ; 8.21 (IH, m) . EIMS m/z (EI+) : 294 (M+) , 237, 224, 210, 196, 170, 139, 123, 70. Anal. Calcd for Cι8Hι8N202.1H20. 0.1CH3OH: C, 68.85; H, 6.52; N, 8.88. Found: C, 68.63; H, 6.45; N, 8.57.
2- (3-Hydroxy-pyrollidin-l-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 315)
White solid. (0.201 g, 0.72 mmol, 72% yield) mp 256-257 °C. UV λraax = 318, 283.5, 273.0, 253.0, 215.0 nm (Methanol) . XH NMR (200 MHz, DMSO) δ2.18 (2H, m) ; 3.45 (4H, m) ; 4.58 (IH, m) ;5.32 (IH, m) 5.41 (IH, s) ; 7.83 (2H, m) ; 7.93 (IH, d) ; 8.05 (IH, d) ; 8.16 (IH, m) ; 8.45 (IH, m) . EIMS m/z (EI+) : 281 (M+) , 264,
236, 224, 210, 196, 181, 170, 139, 114, 67. Anal. Calcd for C17Hι5NO3.0.2H2O: C, 71.67; H, 5.45; N, 4.92 Found: C, 71.65; H, 5.34; N, 4.49
2- [ (Tetrahydrofuran- 2 -ylmethyl) -amino] -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 316) Off white crystalline solid. (0.107 g, 0.36 mmol, 37% yield) mp 139-140 °C . UV λ = 314.0, 280.5, 270.5, 252.5, 216.5 nm (Methanol) . XE NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.65 (IH, m) ; 1.91 (3H, m) ; 3.14 (2H, m) ; 3.21 (IH, m) ; 3.38 (IH, M) ; 3.81 (2H,m) ; 4.11 (IH, m) ; 5.40 (IH, t) ; 5.47 (IH, s) ; 7.54 (2H, m) ; 7.65 (IH, d) ; 7.82 (IH, m) ; 8.08 (lH,d) ; 8.24 (IH, m) . EIMS m/z (EI+) : 295(M+) , 272, 225, 211, 196, 186, 171, 158, 84, 71. Anal. Calcd for Ci8H17N03. 0.3H2O: C, 71.85; H, 5.90; N, 4.66. Found: C, 72.12; H, 5.80; N, 4.33
2- (2 -Methyl-morpholin-4-yl) -benzo [n] chromen-4-one (Compound 317)
Synthesis of 2-Methyl morpholine
Ref: Bettoni et al . Tetrahedron, 1980, 36, 409-415 (i) 1- (2-Hydrox -ethylamino) -propan-2-ol
Propylene oxide (2.32 g, 0.04 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of ethanolamine (10.0 g, 0.16 mmol) in water (50 ml) at 0 °C, and the solution stirred at room temperature for 5 h. Water was removed by evaporation in vaccuo resulting in a colourless oil which was then distilled under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as a colourless oil. (3.61 g, 30.34 mmol, 76%) XE NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) δl.15 (3H, d) ; 2.46 (2H, m) ; 2.71 (2H, t,); 3.62 (2H, t) ; 3.90 (IH, m, ) ; 4.10 (3H, s.) .
(ii) Toluene-4-sulfonic acid 2- [ (2-hydroxy-propyl) - (toluene-4- sulfonyl) -amino] -ethyl ester
Tosyl chloride (11.60 g, 60.80 mmol) was added in small portions to a stirred solution of 1- (2-Hydroxy-ethylamino) - propan-2-ol (3.60 g, 30.25 mmol) in anhydrous pyridine at 0 °C. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 24 h and then poured onto ice-water (200 ml) . The mixture was extracted into DCM ( 100 ml) . The organic extract was washed with 2N HCI, water, and was evaporated in vaccuo to give a brown residue which was used without further purification.
(iii) 2-Methyl-4- (toluene-4-sulfonyl) -morpholine
Sodium hydroxide (0.91 g, 0.02 mol) suspended in methanol (15 ml) was added to a stirred solution of Toluene-4-sulfonic acid 2- [ (2-hydroxy-propyl) - (toluene-4-sulfonyl) -amino] -ethyl ester (9.69 g, 0.02 mol) in DCM (15 ml). After 1 h, water (50ml) was added to the solution. The organic layer was collected, dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vaccuo to yield a green oily residue. This was purified by chromatographic separation (20% Ethyl acetate : petrol) to yield the title compound as a white solid. (1.70 g, 6.66 mmol , 33%).
(iv) 2 -Methyl morpholine 2-Methyl-4- (toluene-4-sulfonyl) -morpholine (1.65g, 6.51 mmol) was dissolved in warm pentanol ( 30 ml) . The solution was cooled to room temperature and sodium ( 1.49 g, 65 mmol) was added in small portions. The reaction mixture was stirred vigorously and heated to reflux for 3 h. Upon cooling, water (50 ml) was added. The two layers were separated, the aqueous layer was extracted with ether, and this in turn was extracted with 2N HCI. The alcoholic soution was extracted with 2N HCI. The combined acidic solutions were then made alkaline by addition of sodium hydrogen carbonate, and continuously extracted with ether. The ether was evaporated in vaccuo to yield the title compound as a colourless oil. (0.517 g, 5.11 mmol, 79%) XH NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) δl.15 (3H, d) ; 2.74 (5H, m) ; 3.81 (4H, m) .
Final compound (compound 317)
Off white crystalline solid. (0.085'g, 0.29 mmol, 20% yield), mp 181-183 °C. UV λ = 214.4, 217.4(λmax), 255.0, 272.8, 281.8, 300.8, 315.2 nm (Methanol). FT-IR (cm"1) = 3174, 2976, 2860, 1614, 1557, 1388, 1245, 1086, 795, 747. 1H NMR (200MHz, CDC13) δl.25(3H, d) ; 2.81(1H, t) ; 3.16(1H, dt) ; 3.71 (2H, m) ; 3.83 (2H, t) ; 4.02 (IH, m) ; 5.55(1H, s) ; 7.55 (2H, m) ; 7.66 (IH, d) ; 7.83 (IH, d) ; 8.06 (IH, d) ; 8.17 (IH, d) . ESMS m/e = 296 (M+l). Anal. Calcd. For C18Hι7N03. 0.1H2O: C, 72.76; H, 5.83; N, 4.71. Found: C, 72.74; H, 5.77; N, 4.60.
(f) 2- (4-Hydroxymethyl-piperidin-l-yl) -benzo [h chromen-4-one (Compound 318)
Prepared from (Benzo- [h] -4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) - thiomethylpolystyrene-divinylbenzene resin and 4 -piperidine methanol (0.0027 g, 0.036 mmol). Product obtained = 0.0039 g. m/z (ES+) : 310 (M+l) 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.21
2- [ (2 -Hydroxy-2-phenyl-ethyl) -methyl-amino] benzo [hi chromen-4- one (Compound 319) m/z (ES+) : 346 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.30
2- (3-Diethylamino-propylamino) -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 320) m/z (ES+) : 325 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.19
2- ( (S) -2-Hydroxymethyl-pyrrolidin-l-yl) -benzo [h chromen-4-one (Compound 321) m/z (ES+) : 296 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.29
2- (3-Methoxy-propylamino) -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 322) m/z (ES+) : 284 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.32
2- (l-Benzyl-piperidin-4-ylamino) -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 323) m/z (ES+) : 385 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.17
2- (Cyclopentylami.no) -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 324) m/z (ES+) : 280 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.33 2- (2, 2-Dimethoxy-ethylamino) benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 325) m/z (ES+) : 300 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.29
2-Butylamino-benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 326) m/z (ES+) : 268 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.30
2- (2 -Trifluoromethyl-benzylamino) -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 327) m/z (ES+) : 370 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.31
2- (3-Hydroxy-propylamino) -benzo [h chromen-4-one (Compound 328) m/z (ES+) : 270 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.12
2- (2-Hydroxy-2-phenyl-ethylamino) -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 329) m/z (ES+) : 332 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.22
2- (Thiazolidin-3 -yl) -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 330) m/z (ES+) : 284 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.35
2- (2-Hydroxy-propylamino) -benzo [h chromen-4-one (Compound 331)
m/z (ES+) : 270 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.15
2- [ (2 -Hydroxy-ethyl)methyl-amino] -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 332) m/z (ES+) : 270 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.19
2- (Ethyl-hyroxymethyl-amino)benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 333) m/z (ES+) : 284 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.25 2- (Dibutylamino) -benzo [h chromen-4-one (Compound 334) m/z (ES+) : 324 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.26
2- (2-Methoxy-ethylamino) -benzo [ ] chromen-4-one (Compound 335) m/z (ES+) : 270 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.10
2- (Isopropylamino) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one (Compound 336) m/z (ES+) : 254 (M+l); 5% Methanol/DCM, Rf = 0.27
Route 7b
2-Hydroxy-4- (4-methoxybenzyloxy) -acetophenone.
A mixture of 2 , 4-dihydroxyacetophenone (7.30 g, 48 mmol), potassium carbonate (7.30 g, 53 mmol) and sodium iodide (0.75 g, 5.0 mmol) in anhydrous acetonitrile (60 ml) was treated with 4-methoxybenzyl chloride (6.5 ml, 48 mmol) . The mixture was heated to 65 °C and stirred for 16 h. The mixture was treated with IM hydrochloric acid (120 ml) and extracted into ethyl acetate (120 ml) . The ethyl acetate extract was washed with IM hydrochloric acid (100 ml) and brine (100 ml) , dried over sodium sulphate and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was stirred vigorously in ether and filtered to provide 6.31 g (23.4 mmol, 49% yield) of the title compound as a beige powder.
(a) 4-Hydroxy-7- (4-methoxybenzyloxy) -chromen-2-thione.
Prepared from 2-hydroxy-4- (4-methoxybenzyloxy) -acetophenone (5.44 g, 20 mmol) affording 2.04 g (6.5 mmol, 32% yield) as a yellow powder.
(e) S- (7- (Hydroxy) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) - thiomethylpolystyrene-divinylbenzene resin.
Prepared from Merrifield resin (1% cross-linked, 1.2 mmol/g) (0.70 g, 0.84 mmol) and a solution of 4-hydroxy-7- (4- methoxybenzyloxy) -chromen-2-thione (0.70 g, 2.2 mmol) in DMF (3 ml) .
(g, followed by f (i) (ii) ) 7- (Benzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 337)
Prepared from S- (7- (Hydroxy) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) - thiomethylpolystyrene-divinylbenzene resin (0.030 g) affording 0.0014 g (0.004 mmol) as a crude residue.
7- (4-Cyanobenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4 -one (Compound 338)
Estimated 88% pure by LC-MS; ESMS m/z = 363 (M+l)+.
Methyl 4- (2- (morpholin-4-yl) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-7-yloxymethyl) - benzoate (Compound 339)
Estimated 74% pure by LC-MS; ESMS m/z = 396 (M+l)+.
Methyl 3- (2- (morpholin-4-yl) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-7-yloxymethyl) - benzoate (Compound 340) Estimated 82% pure by LC-MS; ESMS m/z = 396 (M+l)+.
7- (3-Chlorobenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 341)
Estimated 90% pure by LC-MS; ESMS m/z = 374, 372 (M+l)+.
7- (3-Methylbenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 342)
Estimated 86% pure by LC-MS; ESMS m/z = 352 (M+l)+.
Examples of compounds synthesised using a variant of route 7b in which a 2 , 5-dihydroxyacetophenone starting material was used in place of 2 , 4-dihydroxyacetophenone include the following: 6-Hydroxy-2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 343)
S- (6- (Hydroxy) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) -thiomethylpolystyrene- divinylbenzene resin (0.030 g, <0.036 mmol) was swelled in DCM (2 ml) . After shaking for 10 minutes the mixture was treated with 277-chloroperbenzoic acid (0.2 g, 1.1 mmol) . The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 3 h and then filtered. The resin was washed in order with DCM, methanol, DCM and resuspended in DCM (2 ml) . After shaking for 15 minutes the mixture was treated with a solution of morpholine (0.005 ml, 0.05 mmol) in DCM (2 ml) . The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 h and filtered, washing the resin with DCM and methanol. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude title compound. The product was submitted for analysis for LC-MS without further purification. Estimated >95% pure by LC-MS; ESMS m/z = 248 (M+l) +
((g) followed by (f)(i)(ii))
6- (4-Cyanobenzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 344)
Prepared from S- (6- (Hydroxy) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-2-yl) - thiomethylpolystyrene-divmylbenzene resin (0.030 g) affording a crude residue. Estimated 80% pure by LC-MS; ESMS m/z = 363 (M+l)+.
N- [3- (2- (morpholin-4-yl) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-6-yloxy) -propyl] - phthalimide (Compound 345)
Estimated 66% pure by LC-MS; ESMS m/z = 435 (M+l)+.
Route 7b(i )
Examples of compounds formed using synthetic route 7b (i) are listed in the following tables.
Figure imgf000142_0001
Compound R R Substituent Mw LC-MS
346 Phenyl 4-Br 432
347 Phenyl 4-t-Bu 394
348 Phenyl 4-OMe 382
349 Phenyl - 352
350 Pyridin-4- -yl N-O" 369
351 Pyridin-2- -yl N-O" 355
Figure imgf000142_0002
Compound R R Substituent Mw LC-MS
352 Phenyl 2-C1 404
353 Phenyl 4-C1 404
354 Napth-2-yl - 418
355 Phenyl - 368
356 Ethyl - 320
Figure imgf000142_0003
Compound R R Substituent Mw LC-MS
357 Phenyl 3-OMe 368
358 Phenyl 3-N(=0)0" 383
359 Phenyl 3-F 356
360 Phenyl 3,4-di-F 374
361 Phenyl 4-Me 352
362 Phenyl 4-t-Bu 394
363 Phenyl 3-Br 417
364 Pyridin-3- -yl N-O" 355 365 Pyridin-4-yl N-O" 355
Figure imgf000143_0001
Compound R R Substituent Mw LC-MS
366 Phenyl 416 367 Ethyl 368 368 Methyl Phenyl 430
Route 7c
Examples of compounds formed using synthetic route 7c are listed in the tables below.
Figure imgf000143_0002
Compound Substituent Substituent M position LC"MS
Figure imgf000143_0003
371 4 -Ύ 392
Figure imgf000143_0004
373 2 "OH 338
Figure imgf000143_0005
Figure imgf000144_0001
Compound Substituent Mw LC-MS
Figure imgf000144_0002
Figure imgf000144_0003
Compound Substituent Substituent M position LC-MS
Figure imgf000144_0004
Figure imgf000145_0001
383 4 *—C≡N 333
Figure imgf000145_0002
4 .-°\ 338 386 2
387 .O 384
4 -°γ; 392
388 3
"°r; 392
F
Figure imgf000145_0003
3 o 380
A0^
391 4 *—Cl 342 392 2 */"ΌH 338
393 3 *-^^"OH 338
394 4 *'/^OH 338
395 3 *—OH 324 396 4 *—OH 324 397 4 H 365
0
398 2 ^CF, 376
Figure imgf000145_0004
Compound Substituent Mw LC-MS
Figure imgf000146_0001
Figure imgf000147_0001
Route 8
7- (Benzyloxy) -2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 337) Prepared from benzyl bromide (0.25 ml, 2.0 mmol) .
Recrystallisation from methanol provided 0.098 g (0.29 mmol, 58% yield) as white crystals: mp 170-172 °C. UV λπ,ax = 258.0, 310.5 nm (methanol). XE NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 3.59 (4H, m) ; 3.82 (4H, m) ; 5.31 (2H, S, CH2) ; 5.52 (IH, s, 3-H); 7.13 (IH, dd, J" = 2.3, 8.7 Hz., 6-H) ; 7.28 (IH, d, J" = 2.3 Hz., 8- H) ; 7.45-7.60 (5H, m) ; 7.91 (IH, d, J" = 8.7 Hz., 5-H) . ESMS m/z = 338 (M+) , 179. Anal. Calcd for C20Hι9NO4 : C, 71.20; H, 5.68; N, 4.15. Found: C, 71.15; H, 5.63; N, 3.85.
7- (4-Fluorobenzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 414)
White crystals: mp 201-203 °C. XE NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ
3.60 (4H, m) ; 3.82 (4H, m) ; 5.29 (2H, s, CH2) ; 5.52 (IH, s, 3-
H) ; 7.13 (IH, m, 6-H); 7.29 (IH, m) ; 7.34 (2H, m) ; 7.64 (2H, m, 8-H) ; 7.92 (IH, m, 5-H). ESMS m/z = 344 (M+) 7- (4-Chlorobenzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 415)
White crystals: decomp . > 185 °C. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 3.60 (4H, m) ; 3.82 (4H, m) ; 5.31 (2H, s, CH2) ; 5.52 (IH, s, 3-H); 7.13 (IH, dd, J" = 2.2 , 8.7 Hz . , 6-H); 7.28 (IH, d, J =
2.2 Hz., 8-H); 7.59-7.71 (4H, m) ; 7.92 (IH, d, J" = 8.7 Hz . , 5- H) . ESMS m/z = 371, 373 (M+)
7- (4-Bromobenzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 416)
White crystals: mp 221-222 °C. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ
3.60 (4H, m) ; 3.82 (4H, m) ; 5.30 (2H, s, CH2) ; 5.52 (IH, s, 3- H) ; 7.13 (IH, dd, J = 2.0 , 8.7 Hz., 6-H); 7.27 (IH, d, J" = 2.0 Hz., 8-H); 7.53 (2H, d, J" = 8.3 Hz.); 7.72 (2H, d, J = 8.3 Hz.); 7.92 (IH, d, J" = 8.7 Hz., 5-H). ESMS m/z = 419, 417 (M+)
7- (2-Chlorobenzyloxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 417) White crystals: mp 167-168 °C. XE NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ
3.61 (4H, m) ; 3.81 (4H, m) ; 5.36 (2H, s, CH2) ; 5.54 (IH, s, 3- H) ; 7.15 (IH, dd, " = 2.3, 8.7 Hz., 6-H); 7.35 (IH, d, J" = 2.3 Hz., 8-H); 7.50-7.76 (4H, m) ; 7.93 (IH, d, J = 8.7 Hz., 5-H). ESMS m/z = 373, 371 (M+)
7- (Naphthalen-2-ylmethoxy) -2-morpholin-4-yl-chromen-4-one (Compound 418)
White crystals: mp 263-264 °C. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 3.60 (4H, m) ; 3.81 (4H, m) ; 5.49 (2H, s, CH2) ; 5.53 (IH, s, 3- H) ; 7.19 (IH, dd, ιT = 2.2 , 8.7 HZ., 6-H); 7.34 (IH, d, J = 2.2 Hz., 8-H); 7.62-7.73 (3H, m) ; 7.92 (IH, d, J" = 8.7 Hz., 5-H); 8.02-8.11 (4H, m) . ESMS m/z = 387 (M+) 7-Cyclohexylmethoxy-2- (morpholin-4-yl) -chromen-4-one (Compound 419)
White crystals: mp 187-188 °C. aH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 1.16 (5H, m, cyclohexyl); 1.87 (6H, m, cyclohexyl); 3.60 (4H, m, morpholine); 3.80 (4H, m, morpholine); 3.97 (2H, s, CH2) ; 5.50 (IH, s, 3-H) ; 7.12 (IH, dd, J = 2.1, 8.7 Hz . , 6-H); 7.18
(IH, d, J = 2.1 Hz. , 8-H) ; 7.88 (IH, d, J" = 8.7 Hz . , 5-H) . MS
(ES+) m/z = 344 (M+)
7-Propoxy-2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen- 4 -one (Compound 420)
White crystals: deco p. > 115 °C. XH NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 1.08 (3H, t, CH2CH2CH3) ; 1.86 (2H, m, CH2CH2CH3) ; 3.60 (4H, m) ; 3.81 (4H, m) ; 4.12 (2H, t, CH2CH2CH3) ; 5.51 (IH, s, 3-H); 7.04 (IH, dd, J" = 2.0, 8.7 Hz . , 6-H) ; 7.18 (IH, d, J = 2.0 Hz., 8-H) ; 7.89 (IH, d, J = 8.7 Hz., 5-H) . ESMS m/z = 290 (M+)
N- [2- (2- (Morpholin- 4 -yl) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-7-yloxy) -ethyl] - phthalimide (Compound 421)
White crystals: - decomp. > 230 °C. ESMS m/z = 421 (M+)
N- [3- (2- (Morpholin-4 -yl) -4-oxo-4H-chromen-7-yloxy) -propyl] - phthalimide (Compound 422) White crystals: mp 210-211 °C. NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 2.60 (2H, m, NCH2CH2CH20) ; 3.58 (4H, m, morpholine) ; 3.81 (4H, m, morpholine) ; 3.89 (2H, m, NCH2CH2CH20) ; 4.22 (2H, m, NCH2CH2CH20) ; 5.50 (IH, s, 3-H) ; 6.86 (IH, dd, J = 2.0, 8.6 Hz., 6-H) ; 7.03 (IH, d, J = 2.0 Hz . , 8-H) ; 7.83 (IH, d, J" = 8.6 Hz., 5-H) ; 7.95 (4H, m, phth-H4) . ESMS m/z = 435 (M+) .
Route 9
7-Benzoyloxy-2- (morpholin-4 -yl) -chromen- 4 -one (Compound 423) Prpeared from benzoyl chloride (0.13 ml, 1.1 ml) . Recrystallisation from ethyl acetate provided 0.19 g (0.55 mmol, 55%) as white crystals: mp 204-206 °C. Anal. Calcd for C20H17NOS: C, 68.37; H, 4.88; N, 3.99. Found: C, 68.14; H, 4.87; N, 3.73. UVmax = 258.0, 311.0 nm (methanol). E NMR (200 MHz., d6-DMSO) δ 3.64 (4H, m) ; 3.83 (4H, m) ; 5.65 (IH, s, 3- H) ; 7.45 (IH, m) ; 7.74 (3H, m) ; 8.87 (IH, m) ; 8.09 (IH, ) ; 8.26 (2H, m) . MS (ES) m/z = 352 (M+) ; 179.
Further synthesis details
2 - (2,3-dihydro-benzo [1,4] oxazin-4-yl) -benzo [hi chromen-4-one (Compound 424)
Figure imgf000150_0001
Synthesis of 3 , 4 -dihydro-2H-benzo [1, 4] oxazine :
Figure imgf000150_0002
a) N- ( ertbutoxycarbonyl) -2-aminophenol
Figure imgf000150_0003
A mixture of 2-aminophenol (0.545 g, 5 mmol) and di- ert- butyldicarbonate (1.86 g, 10 mmol) in anhydrous THF (20 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 12h. After concentration and hydrolysis, the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3x30 mL) . The organic layer were combined and dried over MgS0 and the solvent was removed under reduce pressure . The crude product was purified by crystallisation (petrol/ether 8/2) . The pure compound is obtained as a white solid (0.839 g, 86% yield), m.p = 145 °C; Rf = 0.28 (petrol/ether 8/2); LCMS m/z 196 (tM+l]+) ; XE NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) : δ 1.61 (9H, s) ; 6.65 (IH, bs) ; 6.48-7.08 (4H, m) ; 8.16 (IH, bs) ; 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDC13) : δ 29.9 (3C) ; 83.?; 120.3; 122.5; 122.9; 127.1; 127.3; 148.9; 156.7. IR (film) : 3280; 1688; 1146 cm"1.
b) N- (tertbutoxycarbonyl) -2, 3-dihydro-benzo [1,4] oxazine:
Figure imgf000151_0001
A solution of dry acetone (100 mL) containing JV- ( tertbutoxycarbonyl) -2 -aminophenol (0.722 g, 3.69 mmol), potassium carbonate (10.2 g, 73.8 mmol) and 1, 2-dibromobutane (2.54 mL, 29.6 mmol) was refluxed for 18h. The reaction was monitored by TLC (petrol/ether 8/2) . After cooling, the mixture was filtered through celite. After concentration and hydrolysis, the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3x40 mL) , dried over MgS04 and the solvent was removed under reduce pressure. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (petrol/ EtOAc 95/5) to yield the title compound as a white solid (0.70 g, 82%). m.p = 78-79 °C; Rf = 0.44 (petrol/ether 8/2); LCMS m/z 236 ([M+l]+); XE NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) : 1.59 (9H, s) ; 3.87 (4H, m) ; 4.26 (4H, m) ; 6.86- 7.02 (4H, m) ; 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDC13) : δ 27.4 (3C) ; 41.1; 64.6(2C); 80.6 (2C) ; 116.0; 119.2; 122.6; 123.4; 125.2; 144.9; 151.6. IR (film) : 2975; 1696; 1494; 1143 cm"1.
Ref: Kubick et al. Eur. J. Org. Chem. 2001, 311-312 c) 3, 4-dihydro-2H-benzo [1,4] oxazine :
Figure imgf000151_0002
To a solution of dichloromethane (10 mL) containing N- ( tertbutoxycarbonyl ) -2 , 3-dihydro-benzo [1,4] oxazine (0.438, 1.86 mmol) at 0 °C was added slowly trifiuoroacetic acid (1.0 mL, 7.44 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at this temperature during 5h, then the solvent was removed in vaccuo . The crude product was dissolved in EtOAc (15 mL) and washed successively with 10% Na2C03 solution and water. The organic layer was dried over MgS04 and the solvent was removed under reduce pressure. The title compound was obtained pure as brown oil (0.245 g, 98%). Rf = 0.31 (petrol/ether 5/5); LCMS m/z 136 ([M+l]+); aH NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) : δ 3.43 (4H, m) ; 3.54 (IH, s) ; 4.27 (4H, m) ; 6.60-6.82 (4H, m) ; 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDC13) : δ 43.4; 67.7; 118.1; 119.2; 121.3; 123.7; 136.1; 146.6. IR (film) : 3375; 1498; 741 cm"1.
2- (2, 3-dihydro-benzo [1,4] oxazin-4-yl) -benzo [h] chromen-4-one
Figure imgf000152_0001
To a solution of anhydrous THF (5 mL) containing 3,4-dihydro- 2H-benzo [1,4] oxazine (0.324 g, 1.6 mmol), at 0 °C, was added dropwise n-BuLi (1.24 mL, 3.12 mmol, 2.5 N) while the temperature of 0-10 °C was maintained. After stirring for 30 min at 0 °C, the sulfone (0.436 g, 1.6 mmol) was added in THF solution (10 mL) . The reaction mixture was warmed slowly at rt and stirred for 2Oh (TLC ether) . The mixture was poured into 10 mL of 2N HCI (10 mL) and extracted with dichloromethane (3x20 mL) . The organic layers were combined, dried over MgS0 and concentrated under reduce pressure. The crude product was purified by preparative HPLC to yield the title compound as a yellow solid (2 mg) . LCMS m/z 330 ([M+l]+); XH NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) : 4.01 (2H, m, CH2N) , 4.35 (2H, m, CH20) , 6.06 (IH, s) , 6.85-7.05 (4H, m, ArH), 7.44-8.28 (6H, m, ArH). Ref: Wynberg et al . J. Org. Chem. 1993, 58, 5101-5106
Biological Examples
DNA-PK inhibi tion In order to assess the inhibitory action of the compounds against DNA-PK in vi tro, the following assay was used to determine IC50 values.
Mammalian DNA-PK, isolated from Hela cell nuclear extract (Gell, D. and Jackson S.P., Nucleic Acids Res . 27:3494-3502 (1999) ) , was incubated with Z buffer (25 mM Hepes (Sigma) ; 12.5 mM MgCl2 (Sigma); 50 mM KC1 (Sigma); lmM DTT (Sigma); 10% Glycerol (Sigma); 0. 1% NP-40 (Sigma); pH 7.4) in polypropylene 96 well plates and varying concentrations of inhibitor added. All compounds were diluted in DMSO to give a final assay concentration of between 10 and 0.001 μM, with DMSO being at a final concentration of 1% per well. The total assay volume per well was 40 μl.
After 10 minutes of incubation at 30°C the reactions were initiated by the addition of Na-ATP (50μM final), 33P-γATP and a 30mer double stranded DNA oligonucleotide (lOng/μl) in a volume of lOμl. Designated positive and negative reaction wells were done in combination with compound wells (unknowns) in order to calculate % enzyme activities. The plates were then shaken for 2 minutes and incubated at 30°C for 45 minutes. Following the incubation, the reactions were quenched by the addition of 50 μl 30% acetic acid to each well. The plates were then shaken for 5 minutes and the contents of each plate (80 μl from each well) transferred over to a 96 well Polyfiltronics filtration plate, containing P81- phosphocellulose membrane (TRADE MARK) (Whatman, UK) . The solutions were vacuum pumped through the membrane and each well membrane washed four times using 300 μl of 15% acetic acid. The well membranes were then air dried and 20 μl of scintillant was added to each well.
The plates were transferred to a TopCount NXT (TRADE MARK) (Packard, UK) for scintillation counting. Values recorded are counts per minute (cpm) following a 1 minute counting time for each well .
The enzyme activity for each compound is then calculated using the following equation:
, ., , . .,_- % Inhibition =100-
Figure imgf000154_0001
^ (mean positive cpm - mean negative cpm) ,
The results are detailed below in Table 1 as IC50 values (the concentration at which 50% of the enzyme activity is inhibited) . These are determined over a range of different concentrations, normally from 10 μM down to 0.01 μM. Such IC50 values are used as comparative values to identify increased compound potencies. LY294002 exhibited an IC50 of 1.5 μM.
Enhancement Ratio The Enhancement Ratio (ER) is a ratio of the enhancement of cell growth inhibition elicited by the DNA-PK inhibitor after 2 Grays of irradiation compared to untreated control cells. DNA-PK inhibitors were used at a fixed concentration of 25 micromolar. Radiation was delivered by a Faxitron 43855D X- ray system at a dose rate of lGy per minute The Enhancement ratio at 2 Gy irradiation was calculated from the formula:
_ Cell growth in presence of DNA-PK inhibitor x Cell growth after IR
ER —
Cell growth of untreated cells x Cell growth after IR in presence of DNA-PK inhibitor
Cell growth was assessed using the sulforhodamine B (SRB) assay (Skehan, P., Storung, R., Scudiero, R. , Monks, A., McMahon, J. , Vistica, D. , Warren, J. T., Bokesch, H., Kenny, S. and Boyd, M. R. (1990) New colorimetric cytotoxicity assay for anticancer-drug screening. J. Natl. Cancer Inst . 82:1107- 1112) . 400 HeLa cells were seeded into each well of a flat- bottomed 48 -well microtiter plate in a volume of 200 μl and incubated for 6 h at 37°C. Cells were either replaced with media alone or with media containing DNA-PK inhibitor at a final concentration of 25 μM. Cells were allowed to grow for a further 1 h before irradiation or mock irradiation. Cells untreated with DNA-PK inhibitor or unirradiated were used as a control. Cells treated with DNA-PK inhibitor alone were used to assess the growth inhibition by the DNA-PK inhibitor.
Cells were left for a further 16 h before replacing the media and allowing the cells to grow for a further 6 days at 37°C. The media was then removed and the cells fixed with 200μl of ice cold 10% (w/v) trichloroacetic acid. The plates were incubated at 4°C for 20 minutes and then washed four times with water. Each well of cells was then stained with 200μl of 0.4% (w/v) SRB in 1% acetic acid for 20 minutes before washing four times with 1% acetic acid. Plates were then dried for 2 h at room temperature. The dye from the stained cells was solubilized by the addition of lOOμl of lOmM Tris Base into each well. Plates were gently shaken and left at room temperature for 30 minutes before measuring the optical density at 564nM on a Microquant microtiter plate reader.
The results are detailed below in table 2. LY294002 exhibited an Enhancement Ration of 1.09.
PI 3-kinase inhibi tion
In order to assess the inhibitory action of the compounds against PI 3-kinase in vi tro, the following assay was used to determine IC50 values.
Baculoviral recombinant GST-fused PI 3-kinase (pll0 /p85α) was purified from Sf9 insect cells using GSH-sepharose affinity chromatography as described (Wymann, M. T et al . , (1996) Wortmannin inactivates phosphoinositide 3-kinase by covalent modification of Lys-802, a residue involved in the phosphate transfer reaction. Mol. Cell Biol. 16:1722-1733). PI 3-kinase
(1 μl) was diluted in reaction buffer (89 μl of 50 mM Hepes pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM Sodium Orthovanadate, containing 20 μg of phosphatidylinositol) and varying concentrations of inhibitor compound added. All compounds were diluted in DMSO to give a final assay concentration of beween 100 and 0.1 μM, with DMSO being at a final concentration of 1%. After 10 minutes of incubation at 37°C the reactions were initiated by the addition of 10 μl of 50 μM Na-ATP, 20 mM MgCl2 and 2.5 μCi 33p-γATP. Reactions were incubated for a further 20 minutes at 37 °C, before quenching with the addition of 400 μl of chloroform/methanol (1:1). Reactions were acidified by the addition of 200 μl of IM HCI, before separation of the organic and aqueous phases by centrifugation at 10,000g for 30 seconds. The organic phase was transferred to a fresh tube and washed twice with 150 μl of IM hydrochloric acid/methanol (1:1), discarding the aqueous phase. The washed reaction product was then placed in a white 96-well plate with lOOμl of scintillation fluid and transferred to a TopCount NXT for scintillation counting. Counts per minute, following a one minute counting time, were recorded for each reaction. The inhibition of PI 3-kinase activity by compounds was calculated as described above for the DNA-PK assay.
The selectivity was determined by the following equation:
Figure imgf000157_0001
The results are detailed below in table 3. 294 exhibited an IC50 of 1.5 μM, and a Δ(DNA-PK/PI 3-K) of 1.
ATM inhibi tion In order to assess the inhibitory action of the compounds against ATM in vi tro, the following assay was used to determine IC50 values.
ATM protein was immunoprecipitated from HeLa cell nuclear extract using rabbit polyclonal antisera raised to the C- terminal -500 amino-acid residues of the human ATM protein. The immunoprecipitation was performed according to the methodology described by Banin, S. et al . (1998) Enhanced phosphorylation of p53 by ATM in response to DNA damage. Science 281:1674-1677. 10 μl of immunoprecipitated ATM in
Buffer C (50 mM Hepes, pH 7.4, 6 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM sodium orthovanadate, 4 mM MnCl2, 0.1 mM dithiothreitol , 10% glycerol) was added to 32.5 μl of buffer C containing 1 μg of the ATM substrate GSTp53N66 in a V-bottomed 96 well polypropylene plate. The GSTp53N66 substrate is the amino terminal 66 amino acid residues of human wild type p53 fused to glutathione S-transferase. ATM phosphorylates p53 on the residue serine 15 (Banin, S. et al . (1998) Enhanced phosphorylation of p53 by ATM in response to DNA damage. Science 281:1674-1677). Varying concentrations of inhibitor were then added. All compounds were diluted in DMSO to give a final assay concentration of beween 100 and 1 μM, with DMSO being at a final concentration of 1%. After 10 minutes of incubation at 37°C, the reactions were initiated by the addition of 5 μl of 50 μM Na-ATP. After 1 h with shaking at 37°C, 150 μl of phosphate buffered saline (PBS) was added to the reaction and the plate centrifuged at 1500 rpm for 10 minutes. 5 μl of the reaction was then transferred to a 96 well opaque white plate containing 45 μl of PBS to allow the GSTp53N66 substrate to bind to the plate wells. The plate was covered and incubated at room temperature for 1 h with shaking before discarding the contents. The plate wells were washed twice by the addition of PBS prior to the addition of 3% (w/v) bovine serum albumin (BSA) in PBS . The plate was incubated at room temperature for 1 h with shaking before discarding the contents and washing twice with PBS. To the wells, 50 μl of a 1:10, 000 dilution of primary phosphoserine-15 antibody (Cell Signaling Technology, #9284L) in 3% BSA/PBS was added to detect the phosphorylation event on the serine 15 residue of p53 elicited by the ATM kinase. After 1 h of incubation at room temperature with shaking, the wells were washed four times with PBS prior to the addition of an anti-rabbit HRP conjugated secondary antibody (Pierce, 31462) with shaking for 1 h at room temperature. The wells were then washed four times with PBS before the addition of chemiluminescence reagent (NEN Renaissance, NEL105) . The plate was then shaken briefly, covered with a transparent plate seal and transferred to a TopCount NXT for chemiluminescent counting. Counts per second, following a one second counting time, were recorded for each reaction. The inhibition of ATM activity by compounds was calculated as described above for the DNA-PK assay.
The selectivity was determined by the following equation:
IC^ΛATM) A(DNA - PK/ATM) -- 50'
IC5Q(DNA-PK)
The results are detailed below in table 4. 294 exhibited an ICso of >100 μM, and a Δ (DNA-PK/ATM) of >67.
All the compounds showed activity in DNA-PK inhibition, exhibiting an IC50 of less than about 12 μM and/or % inhibition at 1 μM of more than about 22%.
Selected compounds and their IC50 values are listed in table 1.
Compounds which exhibited particular efficacy in DNA-PK inhibition, having an IC50 of less than about 1 μM and/or % inhibition of more than about 50 at 1 μM, include 270, 271, 272, 279, 267, 269, 268, 59, 60, 73, 131, 123, 139, 74, 125, 126, 127, 99, 124, 140, 143, 118, 105, 106, 104, 146, 107, 114, 163, 215, 194, 166, 187, 167, 157, 200, 169, 170, 202, 211, 173, 175, 176, 178, 179, 190, 192, 212, 182, 214, 203, 198, 205, 206, 264, 242, 258, 260, 247, 249, 252, 253, 255, 37, 31, 64, 65, 32, 68, 35, 36, 72, 293, 301, 297, 283, 287, 289, 288, 304, 5, 1, 292, 291, 290, 3, 4, 337, 418, 416, 422, 415, 6, 318, 338, 339, 340, 341, 426, 317, 366, 375, 385, 403, 404, 408, 409, 410, 389, 394 and 413.
Table 1: DNA-PK Inhibition
Figure imgf000159_0001
Figure imgf000160_0001
Figure imgf000161_0001
Table 2 : Enhancement Ratio
Table 3: PI 3-kinase Inhibition
Table
Figure imgf000162_0001
Figure imgf000163_0001

Claims

Claims
1. Use of a compound of formula I:
Figure imgf000164_0001
(I) and isomers, salts, solvates, chemically protected forms, and prodrugs thereof, in the preparation of a medicament for inhibiting the activity of DNA-PK, wherein:
R1 and R2 are independently hydrogen, an optionally substituted Cι_7 alkyl group, C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or C5-20 aryl group, or may together form, along with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 ring atoms ;
X and Y are selected from CR4 and O, 0 and CR'4 and NR"4 and N, where the unsaturation is in the appropriate place in the ring, and where one of R3 and R4 or R'4 is an optionally substituted C3_20 heteroaryl or Cs_20 aryl group, and the other of R3 and R4 or R'4 is H, or R3 and R4 or R"4 together are -A-B-, which collectively represent a fused optionally substituted aromatic ring; except that when X and Y are CR4 and O, R3 and R4 together form a fused benzene ring, and R1 and R2 together with the N to which they are attached form a morpholino group, then the fused benzene does not bear as a sole substituent a phenyl substituent at the 8- position.
2. The use of a compound according to claim 1, wherein the compounds are of formula la or lb:
Figure imgf000165_0001
( la) ( lb)
where one of R3 and R4 (or R'4) is a C3.20 heteroaryl or C5- 20 aryl group, and the other of R3 and R4 (or R'4) is H
3. The use of a compound according to claim 1, wherein the compounds are of formula la or lc:
Figure imgf000165_0002
(la) (lc)
where R3 and R4 or R"4 together are -A-B- , which collectively represent a fused optionally substituted aromatic ring.
4. The use of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 3 , wherein R1 and R2 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a morpholino group.
5. The use of a compound according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein R4 or R'4 is H and R3 is C5-20 aryl .
6. The use of a compound according to claim 5, wherein R3 is optionally substituted phenyl .
7. The use of a compound according to claim 6, wherein R3 is phenyl substituted with a substituent selected from halo, Ci-7 alkyl, ether, alkoxy, nitro, cyano, acyl, formyl, ester, acyloxy, hydroxy, carboxy, C5-20 aryl, C3_20 heterocyclyl, acylamido, acylureido, thioureido, carbamate, carbazoyl, amido and amino.
8. The use of a compound according to claim 6 or claim 7, wherein R3 is a mono-substituted phenyl.
9. The use of a compound according to claim 8, wherein R3 is a 4-substituted phenyl.
10. The use of a compound according to any one of claims 6 to 9, wherein the phenyl substituent is further substituted by halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, ester, ether, acyloxy, acyloxy, acyl, thioether, carboxy, amino C5-20 aryl, Cι-7 alkyl or C3-2o heterocyclyl.
11. The use of a compound according to claim 3, wherein -A-B- represents a fused aromatic ring which is benzene, and the fused benzene is unsubstituted at the 5 position and one of 6, 7 and 8 positions are substituted.
12. The use of a compound according to claim 11, wherein one of the 6, 7 and 8 positions is substituted by a substituent selected from halo, ether, C5-20 aryl optionally substituted by Cχ_7 alkyl, Cι_7 alkyl optionally substituted by C5-20 aryl, C3-20 heteroaryl optionally substituted by acyl, C3_2o heterocyclyl, amino, and sulfonoxy.
13. The use of a compound according to claim 12, wherein one of the 6, 7 and 8 positions is substituted by mono- substituted phenyl and the phenyl substituent is selected from ester, ether, cyano, halo, Cι_7 alkyl, acyl, C5-20 aryl, hydroxy, amido, amino and carboxy.
14. The use of a compound according to claim 13, wherein the phenyl is substituted at the 7-position only.
15. The use of a compound according to claim 14, wherein the substituent at the 7 position is selected from hydroxy, Ci-7 alkoxy (including Cχ.7 alkyl-Cχ_7 alkoxy and C3-20 aryl-Cχ-7 alkoxy) and acyloxy.
16. The use of a compound according to claim 15, wherein the Cι_7 alkoxy is selected from ethoxy, optionally substituted aryloxy, alkoxy, sulfonoxy, and methoxy where the alkoxy substituent is preferably optionally substituted C5-20 aryl
17. The use of a compound according to claim 16, wherein the C5-20 aryl group is optionally substituted phenyl.
18. The use of a compound according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the compound selectively inhibits the activity of DNA-PK compared to PI 3-kinase and/or ATM.
19. The use of a compound, said compound being as defined in any one of claims 1 to 17, in the preparation of a medicament for use as an adjunct in cancer therapy or for potentiating tumour cells for treatment with ionising radiation or chemotherapeutic agents.
20. The use of a compound, said compound being as defined in any one of claims 1 to 17, in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of retroviral mediated diseases or disease ameliorated by the inhibition of DNA- PK.
21. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as defined in any one of claims 1 to 17, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent .
22. A compound as defined in any one of claims 1 to 17, for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body.
23. A method for the treatment of a retroviral mediated disease or a disease ameliorated by the inhibition of DNA-PK comprising administering to a subject suffering from a retroviral mediated disease or a disease ameliorated by the inhibition of DNA-PK a therapeutically-effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of claims 1 to 17.
24. A method for the treatment of tumours comprising administering to a subject suffering from tumour growth a therapeutically-effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of claims 1 to 17 in combination with ionising radiation or one or more chemotherapeutic agents.
25. A method of inhibiting DNA-PK in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting a cell with an effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of claims 1 to 17.
PCT/GB2002/003781 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 Dna-pk inhibitors WO2003024949A1 (en)

Priority Applications (16)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
MXPA04000804A MXPA04000804A (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 Dna-pk inhibitors.
CA002454023A CA2454023A1 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 Dna-pk inhibitors in the treatment of retroviral mediated diseases
US10/486,816 US7226918B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 DNA-PK inhibitors
KR1020047002182A KR100905457B1 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 Dna-pk inhibitors
GB0401411A GB2393653B (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 DNA-PK inhibitors
DK02751439T DK1417196T3 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 DNA-PK inhibitors
BR0211889-0A BR0211889A (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 Dna-pk inhibitors
JP2003528797A JP4332032B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 DNA-PK inhibitor
HU0401052A HUP0401052A3 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 Dna-pk inhibitors
DE60229531T DE60229531D1 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 DNA-PK INHIBITORS
AU2002362385A AU2002362385B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 DNA-PK inhibitors
NZ530909A NZ530909A (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 DNA-PK inhibitors
EP02751439A EP1417196B1 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 Dna-pk inhibitors
NO20040636A NO20040636L (en) 2001-08-14 2004-02-12 DNA-PK inhibitors
HK05103214A HK1070368A1 (en) 2001-08-14 2005-04-15 Dna-pk inhibitors
US11/758,332 US7674823B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2007-06-05 DNA-PK inhibitors

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
GB0119865.4 2001-08-14
GBGB0119865.4A GB0119865D0 (en) 2001-08-14 2001-08-14 DNA-PK inhibitors

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10486816 A-371-Of-International 2002-08-14
US11/758,332 Division US7674823B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2007-06-05 DNA-PK inhibitors

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2003024949A1 true WO2003024949A1 (en) 2003-03-27

Family

ID=9920420

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/GB2002/003781 WO2003024949A1 (en) 2001-08-14 2002-08-14 Dna-pk inhibitors

Country Status (23)

Country Link
US (2) US7226918B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1417196B1 (en)
JP (1) JP4332032B2 (en)
KR (1) KR100905457B1 (en)
CN (1) CN1279034C (en)
AT (1) ATE411987T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2002362385B2 (en)
BR (1) BR0211889A (en)
CA (1) CA2454023A1 (en)
CY (1) CY1110269T1 (en)
DE (1) DE60229531D1 (en)
DK (1) DK1417196T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2315377T3 (en)
GB (2) GB0119865D0 (en)
HK (1) HK1070368A1 (en)
HU (1) HUP0401052A3 (en)
MX (1) MXPA04000804A (en)
NO (1) NO20040636L (en)
NZ (1) NZ530909A (en)
PL (1) PL367081A1 (en)
PT (1) PT1417196E (en)
WO (1) WO2003024949A1 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200400237B (en)

Cited By (32)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004089925A1 (en) * 2003-04-03 2004-10-21 Semafore Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pi-3 kinase inhibitor prodrugs
WO2006032869A1 (en) * 2004-09-20 2006-03-30 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna-pk inhibitors
US7049313B2 (en) 2002-02-25 2006-05-23 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Ltd. ATM inhibitors
US7105518B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2006-09-12 Cancer Research Technology Limited Thiopyrane-4-ones as DNA protein kinase inhibitors
WO2006109081A1 (en) * 2005-04-15 2006-10-19 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna-pk inhibitors
JP2007501836A (en) * 2003-08-13 2007-02-01 クドス ファーマシューティカルズ リミテッド Aminopyrones and their use as ATM inhibitors
US7226918B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2007-06-05 Cancer Research Technology Limited DNA-PK inhibitors
WO2008009934A1 (en) * 2006-07-18 2008-01-24 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Synthesis of 2-amino-substituted 4-oxo-4h-chromen-8.yl-trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid esters
WO2009010761A1 (en) * 2007-07-19 2009-01-22 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna pk inhibitors
WO2009130469A1 (en) * 2008-04-25 2009-10-29 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna-pk inhibitors
US7642254B2 (en) 2005-02-09 2010-01-05 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited ATM inhibitors
WO2010136778A1 (en) * 2009-05-29 2010-12-02 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dibenzothiophene derivatives as dna- pk inhibitors
WO2011001114A1 (en) 2009-07-02 2011-01-06 Sanofi-Aventis Novel (6-oxo-1, 6-dihydro-pyrimidin-2-yl)-amide derivatives, preparation thereof, and pharmaceutical use thereof as akt(pkb) phosphorylation inhibitors
WO2011001112A1 (en) 2009-07-02 2011-01-06 Sanofi-Aventis Novel 2,3-dihydro-1h-imidazo(1,2-a)pyrimidin-5-one derivatives, preparation thereof, and pharmaceutical use thereof
WO2011001115A1 (en) 2009-07-02 2011-01-06 Sanofi-Aventis Novel 6-morpholin-4-yl-pyrimidin-4-(3h)-one derivatives, and the pharmaceutical preparation thereof as akt(pkb) phosphorylation inhibitors
WO2011001113A2 (en) 2009-07-02 2011-01-06 Sanofi-Aventis Novel 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-pyrimido(1,2-a)pyrimidin-6-one derivatives, preparation thereof, and pharmaceutical use thereof
FR2947548A1 (en) * 2009-07-02 2011-01-07 Sanofi Aventis New 6-morpholin-4-yl-pyrimidin-4-(3H)-one derivatives are protein kinase B inhibitors useful for treating e.g. gastric cancers, glioblastoma, thyroid cancers, bladder cancers, breast cancers, melanoma, sarcomas and larynx cancer
US7909830B2 (en) * 2005-08-25 2011-03-22 Synthes Usa, Llc Methods of spinal fixation and instrumentation
FR2951170A1 (en) * 2009-10-09 2011-04-15 Sanofi Aventis New 6-morpholin-4-yl-pyrimidin-4-(3H)-one derivatives are protein kinase B inhibitors useful for treating e.g. gastric cancers, glioblastoma, thyroid cancers, bladder cancers, breast cancers, melanoma, sarcomas and larynx cancer
WO2011137428A1 (en) * 2010-04-30 2011-11-03 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Methods of treating hiv infection: inhibition of dna dependent protein kinase
WO2012085244A1 (en) 2010-12-23 2012-06-28 Sanofi Pyrimidinone derivatives, preparation thereof and pharmaceutical use thereof
WO2012089633A1 (en) 2010-12-28 2012-07-05 Sanofi Novel pyrimidine derivatives, preparation thereof, and pharmaceutical use thereof as akt(pkb) phosphorylation inhibitors
CN102977063A (en) * 2012-11-26 2013-03-20 盛世泰科生物医药技术(苏州)有限公司 Method for synthesizing 2-morpholine-8-phenyl-4-benzopyran-4-one
WO2013190510A2 (en) 2012-06-22 2013-12-27 Sanofi NOVEL 2,3-DIHYDRO-1H-IMIDAZO{1,2-a}PYRIMIDIN-5-ONE and this1,2,3,4-TETRAHYDROPYRIMIDO{1,2-a}PYRIMIDIN-6-ONE DERIVATIVES COMPRISING A SUBSTITUTED MORPHOLINE, PREPARATION THEREOF AND PHARMACEUTICAL USE THEREOF
JP2014510779A (en) * 2011-04-13 2014-05-01 アストラゼネカ アクチボラグ Chromenone compounds as PI3-kinase inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
US9321790B2 (en) 2012-06-22 2016-04-26 Sanofi Pyrimidinone derivatives as antimalarial agents
EP3042900A4 (en) * 2013-08-29 2017-02-22 Fujifilm Corporation Novel morpholine derivative or salt thereof
US20200101080A1 (en) * 2017-03-31 2020-04-02 Bioventures, Llc Inhibitors of dna pk and uses thereof
WO2020257325A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc. Compositions and methods for editing beta-globin for treatment of hemaglobinopathies
WO2021222287A2 (en) 2020-04-28 2021-11-04 Intellia Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of in vitro cell delivery
WO2022133246A1 (en) 2020-12-17 2022-06-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compositions and methods for editing beta-globin for treatment of hemaglobinopathies
WO2022221696A1 (en) 2021-04-17 2022-10-20 Intellia Therapeutics, Inc. Inhibitors of dna-dependent protein kinase and compositions and uses thereof

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
UY29774A1 (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-03-30 Kudos Pharm Ltd ATM INHIBITOR
US8318723B2 (en) * 2006-08-16 2012-11-27 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrazine compounds, their use and methods of preparation
WO2009008991A2 (en) * 2007-07-06 2009-01-15 Government Of The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services National Institutes Of Health Dna-pkcs modulates energy regulation and brain function
ME03336B (en) 2013-03-12 2019-10-20 Vertex Pharma Dna-pk inhibitors
US11433047B2 (en) * 2015-10-09 2022-09-06 Neurotheryx Canada Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more pyrone compounds, and their use for treating inflammatory and neurodegenerative diseases

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1990006921A1 (en) * 1988-12-21 1990-06-28 The Upjohn Company Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 1-benzopyran-4-ones and 2-amino-1,3-benzoxazine-4-ones
WO1991019707A2 (en) * 1990-06-20 1991-12-26 The Upjohn Company Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 1-benzopyran-4-ones and 2-amino-1,3-benzoxazine-4-ones
WO1992000290A1 (en) * 1990-06-29 1992-01-09 The Upjohn Company Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 2-amino-6-phenyl-4h-pyran-4-ones
WO2001053266A1 (en) * 2000-01-24 2001-07-26 Kinacia Pty Ltd. Therapeutic morpholino-substituted compounds

Family Cites Families (40)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB1303724A (en) 1969-05-14 1973-01-17
JPH0753725B2 (en) * 1987-10-08 1995-06-07 富山化学工業株式会社 4H-1-benzopyran-4-one derivative and its salt, their production method and anti-inflammatory agent containing them
US5284856A (en) * 1988-10-28 1994-02-08 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Oncogene-encoded kinases inhibition using 4-H-1-benzopyran-4-one derivatives
US5703075A (en) * 1988-12-21 1997-12-30 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 1-benzopyran-4-ones and 2-amino-1,3-benzoxazine-4-ones
JPH03215423A (en) 1990-01-18 1991-09-20 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd Vasodilator
US5252735A (en) * 1990-06-29 1993-10-12 The Upjohn Company Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 2-amino-6-phenyl-4H-pyran-4-ones
US5302613A (en) * 1990-06-29 1994-04-12 The Upjohn Company Antiatheroscleroic and antithrombotic 2-amino-6-phenyl-4H-pyran-4-ones
EP0610519B1 (en) 1992-09-02 1999-12-01 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Anti-hiv drug
KR960701633A (en) * 1993-04-09 1996-03-28 가쯔히꼬 나까노 Immunomodulators, cell adhesion inhibitors, and agents for treating and preventing autoimmune diseases (IMMUNOMO-DULATOR, CELL ADHESION INHIBITOR, AND AGENT FOR TREATING AND PREVENTING AUTOIMMUNE DISEASES)
US5378725A (en) 1993-07-19 1995-01-03 The Arizona Board Of Regents Inhibition of phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase with wortmannin and analogs thereof
US5504103A (en) 1993-08-25 1996-04-02 Eli Lilly And Company Inhibition of phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase with 17 β-hydroxywortmannin and analogs thereof
US5468773A (en) 1993-08-25 1995-11-21 Eli Lilly And Company Methods for inhibiting bone loss and cartilage degradation using wortmannin and its analogs
US5441947A (en) 1993-08-25 1995-08-15 Eli Lilly And Company Methods of inhibiting vascular restenosis
CA2133815A1 (en) 1993-10-12 1995-04-13 Jeffrey Alan Dodge Inhibition of phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase with viridin, demethoxyviridin, viridiol, demethoxyviridiol, virone, wortmannolone, and analogs thereof
US6632789B1 (en) 1994-04-29 2003-10-14 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Methods for modulating T cell responses by manipulating intracellular signal transduction
US5480906A (en) 1994-07-01 1996-01-02 Eli Lilly And Company Stereochemical Wortmannin derivatives
GB9521987D0 (en) 1995-10-26 1996-01-03 Ludwig Inst Cancer Res Phosphoinositide 3-kinase modulators
US5733920A (en) * 1995-10-31 1998-03-31 Mitotix, Inc. Inhibitors of cyclin dependent kinases
AU1461197A (en) 1995-11-16 1997-06-05 Icos Corporation Cell cycle checkpoint pik-related kinase materials and methods
GB2302021A (en) 1996-10-16 1997-01-08 Lilly Co Eli Inhibiting bone loss or resorption
CA2292540A1 (en) 1997-06-06 1998-12-10 Jann N. Sarkaria Screening for phosphatidylinositol related-kinase inhibitors
WO1998056391A1 (en) 1997-06-13 1998-12-17 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods for treating human cancers
FR2776291B1 (en) 1998-03-18 2000-06-16 Pf Medicament NOVEL BIS-BENZAMIDE DERIVATIVES, MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREOF, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM AND THEIR USE AS MEDICAMENT
US6348311B1 (en) * 1999-02-10 2002-02-19 St. Jude Childre's Research Hospital ATM kinase modulation for screening and therapies
US6387640B1 (en) * 1999-02-10 2002-05-14 St. Jude Children's Research Hospital ATM kinase modulation for screening and therapies
MXPA02012795A (en) 2000-06-28 2004-07-30 Teva Pharma Carvedilol.
US7179912B2 (en) 2000-09-01 2007-02-20 Icos Corporation Materials and methods to potentiate cancer treatment
ATE290882T1 (en) 2001-01-16 2005-04-15 Glaxo Group Ltd PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOUND AGAINST CANCER CONTAINING A 4-QUINAZOLINAMININE IN COMBINATION WITH PACLITAXEL, CARBOPLATIN OR VINORELBINE
GB0119863D0 (en) 2001-08-14 2001-10-10 Cancer Res Campaign Tech DNA-PK inhibitors
GB0119865D0 (en) 2001-08-14 2001-10-10 Cancer Res Campaign Tech DNA-PK inhibitors
WO2003034997A2 (en) 2001-10-24 2003-05-01 Iconix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of phosphoinositide 3-kinase
US6908932B2 (en) 2001-10-24 2005-06-21 Iconix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of phosphoinositide 3-kinase
US7049313B2 (en) * 2002-02-25 2006-05-23 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Ltd. ATM inhibitors
DK1485377T5 (en) 2002-02-25 2010-12-06 Kudos Pharm Ltd Pyranones are suitable as ATM inhibitors
DE60335359D1 (en) 2002-04-30 2011-01-27 Kudos Pharm Ltd phthalazinone
DE602004026071D1 (en) 2003-08-13 2010-04-29 Kudos Pharm Ltd AMINOPYRONE AND ITS USE AS ATM INHIBITORS
BRPI0515498A (en) 2004-09-20 2008-07-29 Kudos Pharm Ltd dna-pk inhibitors
TW200638938A (en) * 2005-02-09 2006-11-16 Kudos Pharm Ltd ATM inhibitors
AR054438A1 (en) 2005-04-15 2007-06-27 Kudos Pharm Ltd DNA INHIBITORS -PK
UY31232A1 (en) 2007-07-19 2009-03-02 COMPOUNDS DERIVED FROM DIBENZOTIFENILAMINO-CROMEN-4-ACTIVE WAVES REPLACED AND ITS ISOMERS AND APPLICATIONS

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1990006921A1 (en) * 1988-12-21 1990-06-28 The Upjohn Company Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 1-benzopyran-4-ones and 2-amino-1,3-benzoxazine-4-ones
WO1991019707A2 (en) * 1990-06-20 1991-12-26 The Upjohn Company Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 1-benzopyran-4-ones and 2-amino-1,3-benzoxazine-4-ones
WO1992000290A1 (en) * 1990-06-29 1992-01-09 The Upjohn Company Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 2-amino-6-phenyl-4h-pyran-4-ones
WO2001053266A1 (en) * 2000-01-24 2001-07-26 Kinacia Pty Ltd. Therapeutic morpholino-substituted compounds

Non-Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
A. DATTA ET AL.: "REFORMTSKY REACTION ON AROYLKETENE S,N-ACETALS:", SYNTHESIS., vol. 3, 1988, STUTTGART DE, pages 248 - 50, XP002218600 *
CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS, vol. 87, no. 15, 1977, Columbus, Ohio, US; abstract no. 117750g, ERMILI,A. ET AL.: "CHEMICAL A. PHARMA. RESEARCH ON PYRAN DERIVATIVES. NOTE VIII. SYNTHESIS OF 2-(DIALKYLAMINO)-7-METHOXYCHROMONES" page 588; column 2; XP002218602 *
FARMACO, ED. SCI., vol. 32, no. 5, 1977, ITALY, pages 375 - 87 *
J. MORRIS ET AL.: "SYNTHESIS A. BIOLOGICAL EVALUATION OF ANTIPLATELET 2-AMINOCHROMONES.", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY., vol. 36, 1993, AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY. WASHINGTON., US, pages 2026 - 32, XP002218598, ISSN: 0022-2623 *
M. DI BRACCIO ET AL.: "1,2-FUSED PYRIMIDINES VII.", EUROPEAN JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY., vol. 30, no. 1, 1995, EDITIONS SCIENTIFIQUE ELSEVIER, PARIS., FR, pages 27 - 38, XP002218599, ISSN: 0223-5234 *
R.A. IZZARD ET AL.: "COMPETITIVE A. NONCOMPETITIVE INHIBITION OF THE DNA-DEPENDENT PROTEIN KINASE.", CANCER RESEARCH., vol. 59, no. 11, 1 June 1999 (1999-06-01), AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR CANCER RESEARCH, BALTIMORE, MD., US, pages 2581 - 6, XP002218601, ISSN: 0008-5472 *

Cited By (51)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7105518B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2006-09-12 Cancer Research Technology Limited Thiopyrane-4-ones as DNA protein kinase inhibitors
US7674823B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2010-03-09 Cancer Research Technology Limited DNA-PK inhibitors
US7226918B2 (en) 2001-08-14 2007-06-05 Cancer Research Technology Limited DNA-PK inhibitors
US7049313B2 (en) 2002-02-25 2006-05-23 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Ltd. ATM inhibitors
US7396828B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2008-07-08 Semafore Pharmaceuticals, Inc. PI-3 kinase inhibitor prodrugs
JP2006523237A (en) * 2003-04-03 2006-10-12 セマフォア ファーマシューティカルズ， インコーポレイテッド PI-3 kinase inhibitor prodrug
JP2011057686A (en) * 2003-04-03 2011-03-24 Semafore Pharmaceuticals Inc Pi-3 kinase inhibitor prodrug
WO2004089925A1 (en) * 2003-04-03 2004-10-21 Semafore Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pi-3 kinase inhibitor prodrugs
US6949537B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2005-09-27 Semafore Pharmaceuticals, Inc. PI-3 kinase inhibitor prodrugs
EA012240B1 (en) * 2003-04-03 2009-08-28 Семафор Фармасьютикалз, Инк. Pi-3 kinase inhibitor prodrugs
JP2007501836A (en) * 2003-08-13 2007-02-01 クドス ファーマシューティカルズ リミテッド Aminopyrones and their use as ATM inhibitors
US7429660B2 (en) 2003-08-13 2008-09-30 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited ATM inhibitors
WO2006032869A1 (en) * 2004-09-20 2006-03-30 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna-pk inhibitors
US7732483B2 (en) 2004-09-20 2010-06-08 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited DNA-PK inhibitors
JP2008513428A (en) * 2004-09-20 2008-05-01 クドス ファーマシューティカルズ リミテッド DNA-PK inhibitor
US7402607B2 (en) 2004-09-20 2008-07-22 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited DNA-PK inhibitors
US7642254B2 (en) 2005-02-09 2010-01-05 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited ATM inhibitors
WO2006109081A1 (en) * 2005-04-15 2006-10-19 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna-pk inhibitors
US7696203B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2010-04-13 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited DNA-PK inhibitors
WO2006109084A1 (en) * 2005-04-15 2006-10-19 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna-pk inhibitors
US8808296B2 (en) 2005-08-25 2014-08-19 DePuy Synthes Products, LLC Methods of spinal fixation and instrumentation
US7909830B2 (en) * 2005-08-25 2011-03-22 Synthes Usa, Llc Methods of spinal fixation and instrumentation
JP2009543856A (en) * 2006-07-18 2009-12-10 クドス ファーマシューティカルズ リミテッド Synthesis of 2-amino-substituted 4-oxo-4H-chromen-8-yl-trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid ester
WO2008009934A1 (en) * 2006-07-18 2008-01-24 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Synthesis of 2-amino-substituted 4-oxo-4h-chromen-8.yl-trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid esters
WO2009010761A1 (en) * 2007-07-19 2009-01-22 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna pk inhibitors
WO2009130469A1 (en) * 2008-04-25 2009-10-29 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dna-pk inhibitors
WO2010136778A1 (en) * 2009-05-29 2010-12-02 Kudos Pharmaceuticals Limited Dibenzothiophene derivatives as dna- pk inhibitors
WO2011001114A1 (en) 2009-07-02 2011-01-06 Sanofi-Aventis Novel (6-oxo-1, 6-dihydro-pyrimidin-2-yl)-amide derivatives, preparation thereof, and pharmaceutical use thereof as akt(pkb) phosphorylation inhibitors
WO2011001112A1 (en) 2009-07-02 2011-01-06 Sanofi-Aventis Novel 2,3-dihydro-1h-imidazo(1,2-a)pyrimidin-5-one derivatives, preparation thereof, and pharmaceutical use thereof
WO2011001113A2 (en) 2009-07-02 2011-01-06 Sanofi-Aventis Novel 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-pyrimido(1,2-a)pyrimidin-6-one derivatives, preparation thereof, and pharmaceutical use thereof
WO2011001115A1 (en) 2009-07-02 2011-01-06 Sanofi-Aventis Novel 6-morpholin-4-yl-pyrimidin-4-(3h)-one derivatives, and the pharmaceutical preparation thereof as akt(pkb) phosphorylation inhibitors
JP2012531465A (en) * 2009-07-02 2012-12-10 サノフイ Novel 6-morpholin-4-yl-pyrimidin-4- (3H) -one derivatives and their pharmaceutical preparations as inhibitors of AKT (PKB) phosphorylation
TWI466883B (en) * 2009-07-02 2015-01-01 Sanofi Aventis Novel(6-oxo-1,6-dihydropyrimidin-2-yl)amide derivatives, preparation thereof and pharmaceutical use thereof as inhibitors of akt (pkb) phosphorylation
US8507483B2 (en) 2009-07-02 2013-08-13 Sanofi 1H-pyrimidin-2-one derivatives, preparation thereof and pharmaceutical use thereof as inhibitors of AKT (PKB) phosphorylation
FR2947548A1 (en) * 2009-07-02 2011-01-07 Sanofi Aventis New 6-morpholin-4-yl-pyrimidin-4-(3H)-one derivatives are protein kinase B inhibitors useful for treating e.g. gastric cancers, glioblastoma, thyroid cancers, bladder cancers, breast cancers, melanoma, sarcomas and larynx cancer
FR2951170A1 (en) * 2009-10-09 2011-04-15 Sanofi Aventis New 6-morpholin-4-yl-pyrimidin-4-(3H)-one derivatives are protein kinase B inhibitors useful for treating e.g. gastric cancers, glioblastoma, thyroid cancers, bladder cancers, breast cancers, melanoma, sarcomas and larynx cancer
WO2011137428A1 (en) * 2010-04-30 2011-11-03 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Methods of treating hiv infection: inhibition of dna dependent protein kinase
WO2012085244A1 (en) 2010-12-23 2012-06-28 Sanofi Pyrimidinone derivatives, preparation thereof and pharmaceutical use thereof
WO2012089633A1 (en) 2010-12-28 2012-07-05 Sanofi Novel pyrimidine derivatives, preparation thereof, and pharmaceutical use thereof as akt(pkb) phosphorylation inhibitors
JP2014510779A (en) * 2011-04-13 2014-05-01 アストラゼネカ アクチボラグ Chromenone compounds as PI3-kinase inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
WO2013190510A2 (en) 2012-06-22 2013-12-27 Sanofi NOVEL 2,3-DIHYDRO-1H-IMIDAZO{1,2-a}PYRIMIDIN-5-ONE and this1,2,3,4-TETRAHYDROPYRIMIDO{1,2-a}PYRIMIDIN-6-ONE DERIVATIVES COMPRISING A SUBSTITUTED MORPHOLINE, PREPARATION THEREOF AND PHARMACEUTICAL USE THEREOF
US9321790B2 (en) 2012-06-22 2016-04-26 Sanofi Pyrimidinone derivatives as antimalarial agents
US10253043B2 (en) 2012-06-22 2019-04-09 Sanofi 2,3-dihydro-1H-imidazo{1,2-a}pyrimidin-5-one and this 1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimido{1,2-a}pyrimidin-6-one derivatives comprising a substituted morpholine, preparation thereof and pharmaceutical use thereof
US11739100B2 (en) 2012-06-22 2023-08-29 Sanofi 2,3-dihydro-1h-imidazo{1,2-a}pyrimidin-5-one and this 1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimido{1,2-a}pyrimidin-6-one derivatives comprising a substituted morpholine, preparation thereof and pharmaceutical use thereof
CN102977063A (en) * 2012-11-26 2013-03-20 盛世泰科生物医药技术(苏州)有限公司 Method for synthesizing 2-morpholine-8-phenyl-4-benzopyran-4-one
EP3042900A4 (en) * 2013-08-29 2017-02-22 Fujifilm Corporation Novel morpholine derivative or salt thereof
US20200101080A1 (en) * 2017-03-31 2020-04-02 Bioventures, Llc Inhibitors of dna pk and uses thereof
WO2020257325A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc. Compositions and methods for editing beta-globin for treatment of hemaglobinopathies
WO2021222287A2 (en) 2020-04-28 2021-11-04 Intellia Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of in vitro cell delivery
WO2022133246A1 (en) 2020-12-17 2022-06-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compositions and methods for editing beta-globin for treatment of hemaglobinopathies
WO2022221696A1 (en) 2021-04-17 2022-10-20 Intellia Therapeutics, Inc. Inhibitors of dna-dependent protein kinase and compositions and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20070238729A1 (en) 2007-10-11
PL367081A1 (en) 2005-02-21
GB0401411D0 (en) 2004-02-25
ATE411987T1 (en) 2008-11-15
CN1279034C (en) 2006-10-11
DE60229531D1 (en) 2008-12-04
US7226918B2 (en) 2007-06-05
CY1110269T1 (en) 2015-01-14
GB2393653B (en) 2005-02-02
EP1417196B1 (en) 2008-10-22
PT1417196E (en) 2009-01-02
DK1417196T3 (en) 2009-03-02
EP1417196A1 (en) 2004-05-12
AU2002362385B2 (en) 2008-07-31
CA2454023A1 (en) 2003-03-27
HUP0401052A3 (en) 2007-05-29
ES2315377T3 (en) 2009-04-01
NO20040636L (en) 2004-04-02
NZ530909A (en) 2005-10-28
JP4332032B2 (en) 2009-09-16
GB2393653A (en) 2004-04-07
KR100905457B1 (en) 2009-07-02
HUP0401052A2 (en) 2004-09-28
HK1070368A1 (en) 2005-06-17
GB0119865D0 (en) 2001-10-10
BR0211889A (en) 2004-09-21
JP2005503414A (en) 2005-02-03
US7674823B2 (en) 2010-03-09
MXPA04000804A (en) 2004-06-03
CN1543457A (en) 2004-11-03
ZA200400237B (en) 2004-08-18
KR20040032152A (en) 2004-04-14
US20040192687A1 (en) 2004-09-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2002362385B2 (en) DNA-PK inhibitors
AU2002362385A1 (en) DNA-PK inhibitors
Huang et al. Synthesis and antiplatelet activity of phenyl quinolones
CA2603637A1 (en) Dna-pk inhibitors
CA2580229A1 (en) Dna-pk inhibitors
JP6500017B2 (en) Fused 1,4-dihydrodioxin derivatives as inhibitors of heat shock transcription factor 1
CA2693926A1 (en) Dna-pk inhibitors
HU211339A9 (en) Antiatherosclerotic and antithrombotic 1-benzopyran-4-ones and 2-amino-1,3-benzoxazine-4-ones
AU2004265149A1 (en) Aminopyrones and their use as ATM inhibitors
EP1416936B1 (en) Thiopyrane-4-ones as dna protein kinase inhibitors
GB2405093A (en) Pyranone DNA-PK inhibitors, for treating cancer
BRPI0610675A2 (en) dna-pk inhibitors

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MN MW MX MZ NO NZ OM PH PL PT RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TN TR TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DK EE ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC PT SE SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 0401411

Country of ref document: GB

Kind code of ref document: A

Free format text: PCT FILING DATE = 20020814

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2002362385

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004/00237

Country of ref document: ZA

Ref document number: 200400237

Country of ref document: ZA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2454023

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2002751439

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/A/2004/000804

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 530909

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003528797

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 10486816

Country of ref document: US

Ref document number: 338/DELNP/2004

Country of ref document: IN

Ref document number: 1020047002182

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 20028159780

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2002751439

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 530909

Country of ref document: NZ

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 530909

Country of ref document: NZ